Nokia 3660 Extended User Manual
Extended UserâÂÂs Guide
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORP ORATION declar e under our s ole responsibi lity that the p roduct NHL-8 is in conformi ty with the provisio ns of the follow ing Council Directi ve: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found from http://www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribut ion or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form witho ut the pri or w ritten permis sion of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting Peopl e and Xpress-on are register ed trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names me ntioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their resp ective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Ltd é 1998-2002 é 1998-2002 Symbian Ltd. All rights reserved. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbia n Ltd. All rights reserved. Java⢠and all Java- based mar ks are tr ademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems , Inc. USE OF THIS PRODU CT IN ANY MANNER TH AT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHI BITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OB TAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPR ISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPEC IFICALLY AND SEPARAT ELY LICENSED BY MPE G LA, L.L.C. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporatio n. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 51 26739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, a nd 5414425. Other p atents pen din g. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd . 1998. All rights reserved. m-Router Connectivity Components é 2000-2002 Intuwave Limited. All rights rese rved. (www.intuwave.com) US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2003. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the righ t to make changes and improvements to any of the prod ucts describe d in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any specia l, incidental, conseq uential or i ndirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this docum ent are provided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. Ex cept as required by appl icable law, no warranti es of any kind, either exp ress or implied, includi ng, but not limit ed to, the impl ied warranti es of merchantabi lity and fitn ess for a pa rticular purpose, are made in r elation to the accura cy, relia bi lity or contents of this document . Nokia reserves the rig ht to revise this docum ent or withdraw it at any time w ithout prior notice The availability o f particular pr oducts may vary by regi on. Please check with t he Nokia dealer near est to you. 9362394 Issue 2 EN
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contents For your safety ....................................... .... 6 General information .................................. 8 Standby mode ........... ...................... ............ ........... ......... ........ 8 Menu ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ... 10 Options lists ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... ....... 12 Online help........ ........... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........... ... 12 Navigation bar - movin g horizontally.... .............. ......... 13 Actions common to all application s ..................... ......... 13 Volume cont rol ................ ......... ........... ........... ............ ......... 14 Shared memory........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ... 16 Your phone .............. ................................ 17 Making a call............. ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ... 17 Answering a call ................ ........... ............ ........... ......... ....... 19 Log - Call register and genera l log ..... ............. .............. 21 SIM folder ........... ........... .................................. ............ ......... 26 Settings .................................................... 27 Changing general se ttings ...... ........... .............. ........... ..... 27 Phone settings ................. ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... 27 Call settings ............... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ....... 29 Connection settings .................. ........... ............ ........... ....... 31 Date and time ............... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... 38 Security .............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... ........... ... 38 Call barring (network service) ........... ............ ........... ........43 Network ........ ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ .43 Accessory settings ................ ............ ........... ........... ............ .44 Contacts .......................... ......................... 45 Creating contact ca rds ................. ............ ........... ........... ....45 Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory..................... ......... ........... ........... ............ ......... ..........45 Editing contact cards ........... ............ ........... ........... ............ .46 Viewing a contact card .......... ............. ............ ........... ........47 Managing contact groups ......... ............ ........... ............. ....51 Camera and Images ................................ 53 Taking pictures ............. ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ .53 Images - Storing pictures............ ............ ............. ............ .57 Video recorder ........................ ................. 61 Recording a video clip .................. ............ ........... ........... ....61 Watching a video clip...... ........... ....................... ........... ......62 Sending video clips ........ ...................... ....................... ........ 62 Setting up your Video recorder....... ........... ............ ..........62 RealOne Playerâ¢..................................... . 63 Media Guide ......... ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ......... .64 Playing media files .. ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ....64 Sending media files................... ........... ............ ........... ........66
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Changing the settings. .......... ........... ............ ........... ........... 67 Messaging . ............................... ................ 68 Messaging - General informat ion ......... .............. ........... 69 Writing text ............. ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ...... 71 Creating and sending ne w messages......... .............. ...... 74 Inbox - receivin g messages ................. ........... ............ ...... 81 My folders ........... ........... ........... .................................. ......... 85 Remote mailbox . .............. ............ .................................. ...... 85 Outbox ............ ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ...... 91 Viewing messages on a SIM card ................. ............ ...... 91 Cell broadcast (netw ork service) ............ ............ ............. 91 Service command editor... ...................... ..................... ...... 92 Messaging se ttings .............. ........... ........... ............ ........... .. 92 Profiles .............................. ........................ 99 Changing the profile ........... ........... .............. ........... ........... 99 Customising profiles ....... ............ .................................. ...... 99 Favourites .. ...................................... ...... 101 Adding shortcuts ........... ........... ............ ...................... ...... 101 Calendar and To-do ......... ..................... 102 Creating calendar entries................... ........... ........... ...... 102 Setting calendar alarms ... ........... ........... .............. .......... 105 To-do ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........ 106 Importing data from other Nokia phone s ....... .......... 107 Extras ................................ ..................... 108 Calculator ................. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ .... 108 Composer.................... ....................... .................. ......... ....... 109 Converter .................. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ .... 110 Notes ....... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... .......... ........... .. 112 Clock ............... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ....... 112 Recorder........... ........... ............ ......... ........... ............ ........... .. 113 Games................. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... .. 113 Memory card ............. ............ ........... ........... .......... ........... .. 114 Services (XHTML) ..................................117 Basic steps for accessing ............ ........... ............ ........... .. 117 Setting up the phone for the browser service .......... 118 Making a connection .............. ............ ........... ........... ....... 118 Connection security ..... ........... ............ ........... ........... ....... 119 Viewing bookmarks ........... ...................... .................. ....... 119 Browsing ............ ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... .. 120 Viewing saved pages ............. ........... .............. ........... ....... 121 Downloading .................... ............ ......... ........... ........... ....... 122 Ending a connection .................... ........... ............ ........... .. 123 Browser settings................. ........... ........... ............ ........... .. 123 Applications (Javaâ¢) ............................. 125 Installing a Java applic ation ........ ........................... ....... 126 Java application settings ............ ........... .................. ....... 127 Manager - installing applications and software .................................. ...............128 Installing software ........ ........... ....................... ........... ....... 129
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Removing software ....... ........... ............ ........... ........... ...... 130 Viewing memory consumption .................. ............. ...... 130 Connectivity .......... ................................ 131 Bluetooth connection ....... ............ ............. ............ .......... 131 Infrared connection................ .............. ........... ........... ...... 136 Connecting your phone to a computer ......... ............. 138 Sync - remote synchronisation .................. ............. ...... 138 Troubleshooting ..... ............................... 141 Q&A.............. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... .........142 Battery information...................... ........ 145 Care and maintenance ......................... 146 Important safety information ............. 147 Index ............... ....................................... 151
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 6 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further de tailed information is given in this manual. Please refer to the Quick star t guide of the product for instructions on operation, care and maintenance, including important s afety information. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY C OMES FIRST Don't use a hand-held phone while driving. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in air craft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use the phone at a refuelling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NE AR BLASTING Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. Obser ve restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position. Don't to uch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repa ir phone equipment. ACCESSORIES A ND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make ba ckup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other de vice, read its user's guide for deta iled safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CALLING Ensure the phon e is swi tched on a nd in service. Enter the phone nu mber, including
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 7 the area code, then press . To end a call, press . To answer a call, press . EMERGENCY CA LLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until told to do so. Network Services The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 and 1900 networks. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are sp ecial servic es that you arrange through you r wireless se rvice provide r. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them throug h your service provider and obtain instructi ons for their u se from your serv ice provider. Note: Some networks may not support all language-dependent charac ters and/or services. Chargers and accessories Note: Check the model number of any charger before use with this device . This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-8, ACP-12, LCH-9 a nd LCH-12. WARNING! Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and honor privacy a nd legitima te rights of others.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 8 1. General information Nokia 3660 provides various functions, whic h are very handy for daily use, such as Camera, Video recorder, Messagin g, e-mail, Cl ock, alarm clock, Calculator, and Calendar. Stickers in the sales package ⢠The stickers included in the sales packag e contain important information for service and customer support purposes. The sales package also includes instructions on how you should use these stickers. Standby mode The indicators described below are shown wh en the phone is re ady for use, with no characters keyed in. In this state, th e phone is in âÂÂstandby modeâÂÂ. In Fig. 1 : A Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at y our current location. The higher the bar, the stronger the signal. Th e antenna symbol is replaced with the GPRS symbol when GPRS connection has been set to When available and a connection is available in the network or in the current cell. See â Packet data (General Packe t Radio Service, GPRS) â , p. 32 and â GPRSâ , p. 37 . B Shows an analogue or a digital clock. See also settings for â Date and time â , p. 38 and settings for Standby mode â Background image, p. 28 . C Indicates in which cellu lar network the phone is currently being used. D Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar, the more power left in th e battery. E Navigation bar: shows the currently acti ve profile. If the selected profile is General , the current date is displayed instead of the profile name. For further information, see â Navigation bar - moving horizontally â , p. 13 and â Profilesâ , p. 99 . Fig. 1 Standby mode with a background image.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 9 Tip! You can change the selection key shortcuts and the background image. See the setting s for â Standby mode â , p. 28 . F Shows the current shortcuts assigned for the selection keys and . Note: Your phone has a screen saver. If ther e are no actions f or five minutes, the display is cleared and a screen saver becomes visi ble. See p. 29 . To deactivate the screen saver, press any key. Indicators related to actions One or more of the following icons may be shown when the phone is in standby mode: - Indicates that you ha ve received new me ssages to the I nbox in Messaging. If the indicator is blinking, the phone memory is lo w and you must delete s ome data. For further information, see â Memory low â , p. 141 . - Indicates that you ha ve received new e-mail. - Indicates that you ha ve received one or se veral voice messages. See â Calling your voice mailbox â , p. 18 . - Indicates that there are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See p. 69 . - Shown when Incoming call alert has been set to Silent and Message alert tone to Off in the currently active profile. See â Profiles â , p. 99 . - Indicates that the pho neâÂÂs keypad is locked. See the Quick start guide. - Indicates that y ou have an activ e alarm. See â Clock â , p. 112 . - Indicates that Bluetooth is active. Note th at, when data is transmitted via Bluetooth, is shown. - Indicates that all calls to the phone are dive rted. - Indicates that all calls to the phone are diverted to a voice mailbox. See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . If you have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the first line is and for the second line . See â Line in use (network service) â , p. 30 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 10 - Indicates that you can make calls usin g phone line 2 only (network service). See â Line in use (net work se rvice) â , p. 30 . Data connection indicators ⢠When an application is establishing a data connection, one of the indicators below blinks in standby mode. ⢠When an indicator is show n continuously, the connec tion is active. for a data call , for a high sp eed data call, is shown instead of the antenna symbol wh en there is an active GPRS connection. for when the G PRS connection is put on hold during voice calls. for a fax call, for a Bluetooth connection, and for an infra red connec tion. Menu ⢠Press (Menu key) to open the main Me nu. In the Menu, you can access all the applications in your phone. See Fig. 2 , p. 10 . Options in the Menu: Open , List view / Grid view , Delete , Move , Move to folder , New folder , Rename , Help , and Exit . Moving in the Menu ⢠Press the scroll key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with blue arrows 1 to 4 in Fig. 3 , p. 11 ) to move in the Menu. Opening applications or fo lders ⢠Scroll to an application or a folder and pres s the scroll key in the middle (shown with blue arrow 5 in Fig. 3 , p. 11 ) to open it. Fig. 2 The main Menu.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 11 Closing applications ⢠Backstep by pressing Back as man y times as is needed to return to standby mode or select Options â Exit . If you press and hold , the phone returns to standby mode and the application is left open in the background. Note: Pressing will always end a call, even if another applicat ion is active and displayed on the display. When you switch the phone off, applications are closed and any unsaved data is saved automatically. Rearranging the Menu You can rearrange the Menu in a ny order you like. You can place more rarely used applications in folders and move applications that you use more often from a folder to the Menu. You can also create new folders. Tip! Sele ct Options â List view if you want to view the applications in a list. 1 Scroll to the item you wa nt to move and select Options â Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. 2 Move the selection where you want the application to be and press OK . Fig. 3 Using the scroll key to move. 1 2 3 4 5
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 12 Switching between applications If you have several applications open and want to switch from one application to another: Press and hold (Menu key). The application switching window opens showing a list of applications th at are currently open. See Fig. 4 , p. 12 . Scroll to an application and press to go to it. Note: If memory is getting low, the phone may close some applic ations. The phone saves any unsaved data before an application is closed. Options lists In this UserâÂÂs Guide, you can se e the Option s list commands listed on the side of the page. These lists tell you which co mmands are avai lable in different views and situations. Note: The available commands change depe nding on the view you are in. Options Tip! In some situations, when you press the scroll key, a shorter options list appears listing the main comma nds available in the view. Online help Your Nokia 3660 has a help function that yo u can access from any application which has the Options selection, and can be accessed using the key. See Fig. 5 , p. 13 . Fig. 4 Application switching window
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 13 Navigation bar - moving horizontally In the navigation bar, you can see: ⢠small arrows or tabs which te ll you if there are more views, folders, or files you can move to. See Fig. 6 , p. 13 . ⢠editing indicat ors, see â Writing text â , p. 71 . ⢠other information, for example, in Fig. 6 ., 2/14 means that the current picture is the second of 14 pictures in the f older . Press to see the next picture. Actions common to all applications ⢠Opening item s for viewing - When you are view ing a list of files or folders, to open an item, scroll t o an item and press the scroll key or select Options â Open . ⢠Editin g items - To open an item for editing, you sometimes need to first open it for viewing and then select Options â Edit , if you want to change its contents. ⢠Renaming items - To give a new name to a file or folder, scroll to it and select Options â Rename . ⢠Removing, deleting items - Scroll to the item and select Options â Delete or press . To delete many items at a time, you first need to mark them. See the next paragraph: âÂÂMarking an itemâÂÂ. ⢠Marking an item - There are several ways to sele ct items when you are in a list. ⢠To select one item at a time, scroll to it and select Options â Mark/Unmark â Ma rk or press and the scroll key at the same time. A check mark is placed next to the item. ⢠To select all i tems in the list, se lect Options â Mark/Un mark â Mark all . Tip! For information on how to insert text and numbers, see â Writing text â , p. 71 . ⢠Marking multiple items - Press and hold and at the s ame time move the scroll key down or up. As the selectio n moves, a check mark is placed next to the items. To end the selection, stop the scrolling with the scroll key and then release . After you have selected all the items you want, you can move or delete them by selecting Option s â Move to folder or Delete. Fig. 5 Online help topic. Fig. 6 Arrows and tabs on the navigation bar.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 14 ⢠To unmark an item, scroll to it and s elect Options â Mark/Unmark â Unma rk or press and the scroll key at the same time. ⢠Creating folder s - To create a new folder, select Options â New folder . You are asked to give a name to the folder (max. 35 letters). ⢠Moving items to a folder - To move items to a folder or between folders, select Options â Move to folder (not shown if th ere are no folders available). When you select Move to folder , a list of available folders opens and you can also see the root level of the application (for moving an item out of a folder). Select the location you want the item to be moved to and press OK . Searching for items You can search for a name, file, folder, or shortcut by using the search field. In some situations the search field is not visi ble automa tically, and you can acti vate it by selecting Options â Find or just by starting to key in letters. 1 To search for an item, start to key i n text in the search field. The phone immediately starts to search for matches and mo ves the selection on the best match. See Fig. 7 , p. 14 . To make the search more accurate, key in more letters and t he selection moves to the item that best matches the letters. 2 When the correct item is f ound, press to open it. Volume control ⢠When you have an active call or are listeni ng to a sound, press or to increase or decrease the volume level, respectively . Fig. 7 Search field in Contacts
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 15 Loudspeaker Voice v olume ico ns : - for earpiece mode , - for loudsp eaker mode. See also Fig. 8 , p. 15 . Your phone has a loudspeaker f or handsfree us e. Th e loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the phone from a short distance with out having to hold the phone to your ear, for example, having it on a table nearby. The loudspeaker can be used during a call, with sound applications, and when viewing multim edia messages. RealOne P layer⢠uses the loudspeaker by default when you watch a video. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to use other applications while in a call. Activating the loudspeaker To change to using the loudspeaker during an already active call, select Options â Activate loudsp. . A tone is played, is shown in the navigation bar, and the volume indicator changes. See Fig. 8 , p. 15 . Note: The loudspeaker cannot be activated when you have connected a headset to the phone. Important: Do not hold the phone near to your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. The loudspeaker needs to be activated separate ly each time for phone calls, but the sound applications such as Com poser and Recorder use the loudspeaker by default. Turning off the loudspeaker ⢠When you have an active call, select Options â Activate. handset . Headset mode To adjust the volume level when a headset is connected to your phone, press or or use the headsetâÂÂs keys, if available. Fig. 8 Volume indicators for e arpiece and loudspeaker modes are shown in the navigation bar.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 16 Shared memory The following features in your phone use shared memory: contacts, text messages, multimedia messages, images and ringing tones, Video recorder, RealOne Playerâ¢, calendar and to-do notes, and downloaded a pplications. Using any of t hese features leaves less memory for other features. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features. For example, saving many images ma y take all of the shared memory and your phone may display that the memory is full. In this case, delete some of the information or entries reserving the shar ed memo ry.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 17 2. Your phone Making a call Tip! To adjust the volume during a call, press to increase and to decrease the volume level. 1 In standby mode key in the phone number , including the area code. Press or to move the cursor. Press to remove a number. ⢠For international calls, press twice for the international prefix (the character replaces the inter national acce ss code) and then k ey in the country code, the ar ea code without 0 , and the phone number. Note: Calls described here as internatio nal may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Normal positi on: Hold the phone as you would hold any other telephone. Note: Pressing will always end a call, even if another applicat ion is active and displayed. To make a ca ll using voic e tags, see â Making a call by sa ying a voice tag â , p. 49 . Making a call using the Contacts directory 1 To open the Contacts directory , go to Menu â Contacts . 2 To find a contact, scroll to the desired name . Or, key in the first letters of the name. The Search field opens au tomatically and matching contacts are listed. 3 Press to start the call. If the contact has more than one phone number, scroll to the number and press to start the call. Fig. 1 Making a call.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 18 Calling your voice mailbox Tip! If your voice mail requires you to enter a password every tim e you call to listen to your voice messages, you may want to add a DTMF number after the voice mailbox number. This way the password is given automatically every time you call your voice mail. For example, 44123 4567p1234# where 1234 is the password and âÂÂpâ inserts a pause. The voice mailbox (network service) is an answering machine where callers who are unable to reach you can leave you voice messages. ⢠To call your voice mailbox, pr ess and in standby mode. ⢠If the phone asks fo r the voice ma ilbox number, key it in and press OK . You can obtain this number from your service provider. See also â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . Each phone line may have its own voice mailb ox number, see â Line in use (network service) â , p. 30 . Changing the voice m ailbox number To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, go to Menu â Tools â Voice mailbox and select Options â Change number . Key in the number (obtained from your service provider) and press OK . Speed dialling a phone number To view the speed dialling grid, go to Menu â Tools â Speed dial . 1 Assign a phone number to one of the speed dialling keys ( - ), see â Assignin g speed dialling keys â , p. 49 . 2 To call the number: In standby mode, pres s the corresponding speed dialling key and . If the Speed dialling function is set to On : Press and hold the corresponding sp eed dialling key until the call is started. Making a conference call Conference calling is a network servic e that allows you to make a conference call with a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first participant.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 19 2 To make a call to a new participant, select Options â New call . Key in or search the memory fo r the phone num ber of the participant and press OK . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call has been answered, join th e first participant in the conference call. Select Options â Conference . 4 To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2 and then select Option s â Conferen ce â Add to conference . ⢠To have a private conversation with one of the participants: Select Options â Conferen ce â Private . Scroll to the desired participant and press Private . The conference call is put on hold in your ph one, and the other participants can still continue talking with each other while you have a private discussion with one participant only. Once you have finish ed the private conversation, select Options â Add to conference to return to the conference call. ⢠To drop one participant from the conference call, select Options â Conferenceâ Drop participant , then scroll to the participant and press Drop . Tip! The quickest way to make a new call is to dial the numb er and press to start t he call. The existing call is automatically put on hold. 5 To end the active conference call, press . Answering a call ⢠To answer an incoming call, press . ⢠To end the call, press . If you do not want to answer a call, press . The caller will hear a âÂÂline busyâ tone. Tip! If you have ac tivated the Call divert â If busy function to div ert calls, for example, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the cal l. See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . When a call comes in, press Mute to quickly mut e the ringing tone. Fig. 2 Conference call with two participants.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 20 Tip! To adjust the phone tones for different environments and events, for example, when you want your phone to be silent, see â Profiles â , p. 99 . Note: It is possible that the phone assigns a wrong name for the phone number. This happens if the phone nu mber of the caller is not stored in Contacts but the seven last digits of the number match anot h er nu m be r th a t i s s t or e d i n C o n ta ct s . In this case, call identification is not correct. Call waiting (network service) Tip! To end both calls at the same time, select Options â End all calls and press OK . If you have activated the Call waiting service, the network will notify you of a new incoming call while you hav e a call in progress. See â Call waiting: (network service) â , p. 29 . 1 During a call, press to answer the wait ing call. The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, press Swap . 2 To end the active call, press . Options during a call Many options that you can use during a call are networ k services. Press Options duri ng a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , End active call , End all calls , Hold or Unhold , New call , Conferen ce , Privat e , Drop participant , Answer , and Reject . Swap is used to switch between the active call and the call on hold. Transfer is used to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from b oth calls. Send DTMF is used to send DTMF tone strings, for example, passwords or bank account numbers. Glossary: DTMF tones are the tones you hear when you press the number keys on the phone keypad. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes and computerised telephony systems, for example. 1 Key in the digits with - . Each keystroke generates a DTM F tone, which is transmitted while the call is active . Press repeatedly to produce: * , p (inserts a Fig. 3 O ptions d uring a call.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 21 pause of approximately two seconds befo re, or between DTMF characters.), and w (if you use this character, the remainin g sequence is not sent until you press Send again during the call). Press to produce # . 2 To send the tone, press OK . Tip! You can also store a sequence of DT MF tones for a contact ca rd. When you make a call to the contac t, you can retrie ve the sequence. Add DTMF tones to the phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Settings for call diverting When this n etwork servic e is activa ted, you can direct your incomin g calls to a nother number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For details, contact your service provider. Go to Menu â Tools â Call divert . ⢠Select one of the divert options, for example, select If busy t o divert voi ce calls when your number is busy or when you reject incoming calls . ⢠Select Options â Activate to set the divert setting on, Cancel to set the divert setting off, or Check status to check whether the divert is activated or not. ⢠To cancel all active diverts, select Options â Cancel all diverts . For information about the divert indicators, see â Indicators related to actions â , p. 9 . Note: You cannot have barring of incoming ca lls and call diverting active at the same time. See â Call barring (network serv ice) â , p. 43 . Log - Call register and general log Go to Menu â Log . In the log you can monitor phone calls, text messages, packet data connections, and fax and data calls registered by the phone. You ca n filter the log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 22 Tip! To view a list of sent messages, go to Messaging â Sent . Note: Connections to your remote mailbox, multimedia messaging cen tre, or browser pages are shown as da ta calls or packet data connections in the general communications log. Recent calls register Go to Menu â Log â Recent calls . The phone registers the phone numbers of mi ssed, received, and dialled calls, and the approximate duration and cost of your calls . The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network supp orts these functions, and th e phone is switched on and within the networkâÂÂs service area. Options in the Missed, Received, Dialled views: Call , Use number , Delete , Clear list , Add to Contacts , Help , and Exit . Missed calls and received calls To view a list of the last 20 phone numbers from which so mebody has tried to call y ou without success (network service), go to Log â Recent calls â Missed calls . Tip! When you see a note in standby mode about missed calls, press Show to a c c e s s t h e l i s t o f m i s s e d c a l l s . T o c a l l b a c k , s c r o l l t o t h e n u m b e r o r n a m e y o u w a n t and press . To view a list of the 20 numbers or names fr om which you ha ve most recently accepted calls (network service), go to Log â Recent calls â Received calls . Dialled numbers Icons: fo r misse d, for Received, and for Dialled num bers views. Tip! Press in standby mode to open the Dialled numbers view. See Fig. 4 , p. 24 . To view the 20 phone num bers that you have most recently called or attempted to call, go to Log â Recent calls â Dialled nos. Erasing recent ca ll lists ⢠To clear all recent call lists, select Options â Clear recent calls in the Recent calls main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 23 ⢠To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase and select Options â Clear list . ⢠To clear an individual event, open a re gister, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration Go to Menu â Log â Call duration . Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. Tip! To see the call duration timer while you have an active call, select Options â Settings â Show call duration â Yes . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, ro unding-off for billing, and so forth. Erasing call duration timers - Select Options â Cl ear timers . For this you need the lock code, see â Security â , p. 38 . To clear an individual even t, scroll to it and press . Call costs (network service) Go to Log â Call costs . Call costs allows you to chec k the cost of the last call or all ca lls. The call costs are displayed separately for each SIM card.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 24 Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, roundin g-off for billing, taxes and so forth. Call costs limit set by a service provid er Your service provider can limit the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or units of currency. When the limited charging mode is active, calls can be made only as long as the preset credit limit (call cost limit) is not exceeded and you are in a network that supports call cost limit. The number of re maining units is shown during a call and in standby mode. When the charging units have expired, the note Call cost limit reached is displayed. Cont act your service prov ider fo r information on the limited charging mode and charging unit prices. Cost shown as ch arging units or currency ⢠You can set the phone to show the remainin g talk-time in charging units or units of currency. For this, you may ne ed the PIN2 code, see p. 39 . 1 Select Options â Settingsâ Show costs in . The options are Currency and Units . 2 If you choo se Currency , a note requesting you to write the unit price is shown. Key in the cost of your home network charging or credit unit and press OK . 3 Write a name for the currency. Use a th ree-letter abbreviation, for example, GBP. Note: When no more cha rging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emergency number programme d into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Setting a call cost limit for yourself 1 Select Options â Settings â Call cost limit â On. 2 The phone requests you to enter the limit in units. For this you may need the PIN2 code. Depending on the Show costs in setting, enter either the amount of charging units or curren cy. When the charging limit you have set yourse lf is reached, the counter stops at its maximum value and the note Reset all calls' cost counter is displayed. To be abl e to make Fig. 4 The Dialled numbers view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 25 calls, go to Options â Settings â Call cost limit â Off . For this you need the PIN2 code, see p. 39 . Erasing call cost counters - Select Options â Cle ar counters . For this you need the PIN2 code, see p. 39 . To clear an individual even t, scroll to it and pres s . GPRS data counter Go to Log â GPRS counter . Allows you to check the amount of data se nt and received during packet data (GPRS) connections. For examp le, you may be charged for your GPRS connections by the amount of data sent and received. Viewing the general log Go to Menu â Log and press . In the general log, for each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the servic e provider, or access point. See Fig. 5 , p. 26 . Icons: for incoming, for outgoing, and for missed communication events. Note: Sub-events, such as a text message sent in more than one part an d packet data connections, are logged as one communication event . Filtering the log 1 Select Options â Filter . A list of filters opens. 2 Scroll to a filter and press Select . Erasing the conten ts of the log ⢠To erase all the log contents, Recent calls register, and Messag ing deli very reports permanently, select Options â Clear log . Confirm by pressing Yes .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 26 Packet data counter and connection timer ⢠To view how much data, measured in kiloby t es, has been transferre d and how long a certain GPRS connection has lasted, sc roll to an Incoming or Outgoing event with the access point icon and select Optio ns â View details . Log settings ⢠Select Options â Settings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log duration - The log events remain in the ph one memory for a set number of days after which they are automati cally erased to free memory. Note: If you select No log , all the log contents, Rece nt calls register, and Messaging delivery reports are permanently delet ed. â¢F o r Call duration , Show costs in , Call c ost limit , see the sections â Call duration â and â Call costs (network service) â earlier in this chapter. SIM folder Go to Menu â SIM . Your SIM card may provide additional services that you can access in this folder. See also â Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory â , p. 45 , âÂÂConfirm SIM service actionsâÂÂ, p. 40 , âÂÂFixed dialling settingsâÂÂ, p. 40 , and â Viewing messages on a SIM cardâ , p. 91 . Options in the SIM directory: Open , Call, New SIM contact , Edit , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Copy to Contacts , My numbers , SIM details , Help , and Exit . Note: For availability, rates and information on using SIM services, c ontact your SIM card vendor, e.g. network operator , service provider or other vendor. ⢠In the SIM director y, you can see the name s and numbers stored on the SIM card, you can add or edit them, and you can make calls. Fig. 5 The general log.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 27 3. Settings Changing general settings Go to Menu â Tools â Settings . 1 Scroll to a setting group and press to open it. 2 Scroll to a setting you want t o change and press to ⢠switch between options if there are only two ( On / Off ). ⢠open a list of options or an editor. ⢠open a slider view, press or t o i n c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e the value, respectively, see Fig. 1 , p. 27 . Note: You may be able to receive some settin gs from your service provider in a text message. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . Phone settings General ⢠Phone language - You can cha nge the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the format used for date and time an d the separators used, for example, in calculations. There are three languages installed in your phone. If you select Automatic , the phone selects the language acco rding to the informa tion on your SIM card. After you have changed the disp lay text language, you must restart the phone. Note: Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your phone and th e change remains effective until you change these settings again. Fig. 1 A setting slider.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 28 ⢠Writing language - You can change the writing language of your phone permanently. Changing the language affects ⢠the characte rs available when you press an y key ( - ), ⢠the predictive text dictionary used, and Tip! You can also make this change in so me of the editors. Press and select Writin g language: . ⢠the special charac ters that are available when you press the and keys. Example: You are using a p hone where the display texts are in En glish but you want to write all your messages in French. After you change the language, the predictive text dictionary searches fo r words in French and the most common special characters or punctuation mark s used in the French language are available when you press the and keys. ⢠Dictionary - To set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the phone. You can also change this setting when you are in an editor. Press and select Dictionary â Dictionary on or Off . Note: The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. ⢠Welcome note or logo - Press to open the setting. The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Select Default if you want to use the default image or animation. Select Text to write a welco me note (max. 50 letters). Select Image to select a photo or picture from Images . ⢠Orig. phone settings - You can reset some of the settin gs to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See p. 39 . After resetting the settings, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Note: All documents and files that you ha ve created are left as they are. Standby mode ⢠Background image - You can select any im age to be used as a background image in standby mode. Select Yes to select an image from Images . ⢠Left selection key and Right selection key - You can change the shortcuts that appear over the left and right sele ction keys in standby mode. In addition to the applications, you can have the shortcut po int to a function, for example, New message.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 29 Note: You cannot have a shor tcut to an application that you have installed. Display ⢠Contrast - To change the contrast of the di splay to li ghter or darker. See Fig. 1 , p. 27 . ⢠Colour palette - To change the colour pa lette used on the display. ⢠Screen saver timeout - The screen saver is activated when the screen saver time-out period is over. When the screen saver is ac tive, the display is cleared and you can see the screen saver bar. See Fig. 2 , p. 29 . ⢠To deactivate the screen saver press any key. ⢠Screen saver - Select what is shown on the scre en saver bar: time and date or a text you have wr itten yoursel f. See Fig. 2 , p. 29 . The location and background colour of t he screen saver bar changes in one minute inte rvals. Also, the screen saver changes to indicate the number of new messages or missed calls. Call settings Note: To change the settings for call diverting, go to Menu â Tools â Call divert . See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . Send my caller ID ⢠This network service allows you to se t your phone number to be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person to whom you are callin g. Or, the value may be set by y our network operator or service provider when you make a subscri ption ( Set by network ). Call wa iting : (network service) ⢠The network will notify you of a new inco ming call while you have a call in progress. Select: Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deactivate call waiting, or Check status , to check if the function is active or not. Fig. 2 The screen save r.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 30 Automatic redial ⢠When this setting is acti vate d, your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful ca ll attempt. Press to stop automatic redialling. Summary after call ⢠Activate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the duration and cost of the last c all. To s how costs, the Call cost limit needs to be act ivated for your SIM card. See p. 24 . Speed dialling ⢠Select On and the numbers assigned to the sp eed dialling keys ( - ), can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also â Assign ing speed dialli ng keys â , p. 49 . Anykey answer ⢠Select On , and you can a nswer an incoming call by briefly press ing any key, ex cept , , and . Line in use (network service) Voice message indicators: , , or is shown if you have one or several voice messages. ⢠This setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subsc riber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) you want to use for making calls and sending text mes sages. Calls on bo th lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. Note: You will not be able to make c alls if you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service. Tip: To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in standby mode. To prevent line selection, select Lin e change â Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 31 Connection General information about data connections and access points Glossary: Access point - The point where your phone connects to the Internet by way of a data call or packet data connection. An access point can be provided, for example, by a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider for mobile de vices, or ne twork operato r. To define settings for access points, go to Settings â Connection â Access points . A data connection is required to connect to an access po int. Your phone supports t hree kinds of data connections: ⢠a GSM data call ( ), ⢠GSM high-speed data call ( ), or ⢠packet data (GPRS) connection ( ). There are three different kinds of access poi nts that you can define: MMS access point, browser access point, and Inte rnet access point (IAP). Check with your service provider what kind of an access point is needed f or the service you wish to access. You nee d to set acce ss point settin gs, if you want to, for ex ample, ⢠send and receive multimedia messages, ⢠send and receive e-mail, ⢠browse pages, ⢠download Java⢠applications, ⢠use Image upload, or ⢠use your phone as a modem. See also â Data connection indicators â , p. 10 . GSM data calls A GSM data call enables data transmission rates to a maximum of 14.4 kbps. For availability and subscription to data servic es, contact your network operator or service provider.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 32 Tip! The Settings wizard program included in the PC Suite for Nokia 3660 can help you to configure access point and mailbox settings. You can also copy existi ng settings, for example, from your computer to your phone. See the CD- ROM supplied in the sales package. Minimum settings n eeded to make a data call ⢠To insert a set of basic GSM data call settings, go to Settings â Connection â Access points and select Options â New access point . Fill in the following: Data bearer : GSM data , Dial-up number , Se ssion mode : Permanent , Data call type : Anal ogue , and Maximum data speed : Automatic . High speed data call (High Speed Circuit Switched Data, HSCSD) Glossary: High-speed data enables data transm ission rates to a maximum of 43.2 kbps, which is three times faster than the standard data rates of the GSM network. HSCSD is comparable to the speed of ma ny computer modems that communicate with today's fixed telephone networks. For availability and subscription to high-speed data services, please contact your network operator or service provider. Note: Sending data in HSCSD mode may drai n the phoneâÂÂs battery faster than normal voice or data calls, as the phone may send data more frequently to the network. Packet data (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS) Glossary: Packet dat a, or General Packet Radio Service (GPR S), uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending d ata in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiv ing data. Because GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection set up and fast data transmission speeds. Minimum settings n eeded to make a pack et data connection ⢠You need to subscribe to the GPRS servic e. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your network operator or service provider. â¢G o t o Settings â Co nnecti on â Ac cess points and select Options â New access point . Fill in the following: Data bearer : GPRS an d Access point name : enter the name given to
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 33 you by your service provider. See â Creating an access pointâ , p. 33 for further information. Pricing for packet data and applicatio ns Both the active GPRS connection and the applic ations used over GPRS require a fee, for example, using services, sending and receiving data, and text messages. For more detailed information on fees, contact your networ k operator or service provider. See also â Packet data counter and connection timer â , p. 26 . Options in the Access points list: Edit , New access point , Delete , He lp , and Exit . Creating an access point You may have preset access point settings in your Nokia 3660 mobile phone. Or, you may receive access point settings in a smar t messag e from a service provider. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . If there are no access points defined when you open Access points , you will be asked if you want to create one. If there already are access points define d, to create a new acc ess point, select Options â New access point and select:
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 34 ⢠Use default settings to use the default settings. Ma ke th e need ed chan ges and press Back to save the set tings. ⢠Use existing settings to use existing setting information as the basis for the new access point settings. A list of existing access points is opened. Se lect one and press OK . Access point settings are opened with some fields already filled. Editing an access point When you open Access points, the list of alre ady available access points opens, see Fig. 3 , p. 34 . Scroll to the access point you want to edit, and press . Deleting an access point In the list of access points, scroll to the access po int you want to remove and select Options â Delete . Access points Options when editing access point settings: Change , Advanced settings , Help , and Exit . Here you can see a short explanation for ever y setting that may be needed for different data connections and access points. Note: Start to fill in the settings fro m the top because depending on what data connection you select ( Data bearer ) or whether you need to insert a Gateway IP address , only certain setting fields are available. Note: Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provid er very carefully. ⢠Connection name - Give a descriptive name for the co nnection. ⢠Data bearer - The options are GSM data , High speed GSM , and GPRS . Depending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or wi th a red asterisk . Othe r fi elds can be left empty, unless you have been instructed ot herwise by yo ur service provider. Fig. 3 A l ist of a ccess points using different data connections.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 35 Tip! See als o â Settings needed for multimedia messaging â , p. 77 , â Settings needed for e- mail â , p. 80 , and â Setting up the phone for the browser service â , p. 118 . Note: To be able to use a data connection, the network service provider must support this feature, and if necessar y, activate it for your SIM card. ⢠Access point name (for pa cket dat a only) - The access po int name is needed to establish a connection to the GPRS network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Dial-up number (for GSM data and high speed data only) - The modem telephone number of the access point. ⢠User name - Write a user name if required by the service provider. The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service prov ider. The user name is often case-se nsitive. Tip! When you are writing, press to op en the special charac ters table. Press to enter a space. ⢠Prompt password - If you must key in a new password every time you log on to a server, or if you do not want to save your password to the phone, choose Yes . ⢠Password - A password may be n eeded to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The passwo rd is often case-sensitive. When you are writing the password, the characters you enter are shown briefly and then changed to asterisks (*). The easiest way to en ter numbers is to pr ess and select Insert number and then continue entering letters. ⢠Authentication - Normal / Secure. ⢠Gateway IP address - The IP address that the re quired browser gateway uses. ⢠Homepage - Depending on what you are setting up, write either: ⢠the service address, or ⢠the address of the multimedia messaging centre. ⢠Connection security - Choos e whether Transport Layer Security (T LS) is used for the connection. Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. ⢠Session mode - Permanent / Temporary.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 36 Glossary: ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between your phone and your access point. ISDN connections are digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set-up times and faster d ata rates than analogue connections. In order to use an ISDN connection, both your Internet service provider and network operator must support it. ⢠Data call type (for GSM data and high speed data only) - Analogue , ISDN v.110 , or ISDN v.120 defines whether the phone uses an analogue or digital connection. This setting depends on both your GSM network operator and Internet Service Provider (ISP), because some GSM networks do not sup por t certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your ISP. If ISDN connection s are avai lable, they establish connections more quickly than analogue methods. ⢠Maximum data speed (for GSM data and high speed data only) - The options are Automatic / 9600 / 14400 / 19200 / 28800 / 38400 / 43200, depending on what you have chosen in Session mode and Data call type . This option allows you to limit the maximum connection speed when high speed da ta is used. Higher data rate s may cost more, depending on the network service provider. Note: The speeds above r epresent the maximum speed at which your connection will operate. D uring the co nnection, the operating speed may be less, depending on network conditions. Options â Advanced sett ings ⢠Phone IP address - The IP address of your phone. Glossary: DNS - Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates d omain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195 . ⢠Primary name server: - The IP address of the primary DNS server. ⢠Second. name server: - The IP address of the secondary DNS server. Note: If you need to enter the Phone IP address , Primary name server , or Seco nd. name server : , contact your Internet service pr ovider to obtain these addresses. The following settings are shown if you have selected data call and high speed data as the connection type: ⢠Use callback - This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you have a connection withou t paying for the call. Contact your servi ce provider to subscribe to this service. Note: Charge s may apply for certain types of rece ived calls, such as r oaming and high speed data calls. Contact your GSM network operator for more information.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 37 Note: The phone expects the callback call to use the same data call settings that were used in the callback-request ing call. The network must support that type of call in both di rect ions, to and from the phone. ⢠Callback type - The options are Use server no. / Use other no. Ask your service provider for the correct setting to use; it will depend on the service providerâÂÂs configuration. Glossary: PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) - a common networking software protocol that enables any computer with a modem and a phone li ne to connect directly to the Internet. ⢠Callback number - Key in your phoneâÂÂs data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually, this number is the da ta call phone number of your phone. ⢠Use PPP compression - When set to Yes , this option speeds up the data transfer, if supported by the remote PPP server. If you have problems with establishing a connection, try setting this to No . Contact y our service provider for guidance. ⢠Use login script - The options are Yes / No . ⢠Login script - Insert the login script. ⢠Modem initialisation (Modem initialisation string)- Controls your phone using modem AT commands. If required, enter characters specified by your GSM network service provider or Internet service provider. GPRS Go to Settings â Connection â GPRS . The GPRS settings affect all access po ints using a packet data connection. GPRS connection - If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the phone registers to the GPRS network and sending text messages will be done via GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, is quicker. If you select When needed , the phone will us e a packet data connection only if you s tart an application or action that needs it. The GPRS connection is closed after it is not used by any application. Note: If there is no GPRS coverage and yo u have chosen When available , the phone will periodically try to establish a packet data connection.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 38 Access point - The access point name is needed when you want to use your phone as a packet data modem to your comput er. For mo re information on modem connections, see p. 138 . Data call Go to Settings â Connection â Data call . The Data call settings affect all access points using a data call and high speed data call. Online time - If there are no actions the data call is dropped automatically after a time- out period. The options are User defined , in which case you enter a time, or Unlimited . Date and time Tip! See also the Language settings, p. 27 . ⢠The date and time settings allow you to defi ne the date and time used in your phone, as well as change the date and time format and separators. Choose Clock type â Analogue or Digital to change the clock shown in standby mode. Choose Auto time update if you want the mobile phone network to update time, date, and time zone information to your phone (network service). Note: For the Auto time update setting to take effect, the phone needs to be restarted. Security Phone and SIM Explanations for the different secu rity codes that may be needed: ⢠PIN code (4 to 8 digits) - The PIN (Personal Identifica tion Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 39 After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entr ies, the PIN code is blocked. If the PIN code is blocked, you need to unblock the PIN code before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about the PUK code. ⢠PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) - The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is required to access some functions, such as call cost count ers. ⢠Lock code (5 digits) - The lock code can be used to lock the phone and keypad to avoid unauthorised use. Note: The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unautho rised use of your phone, change the lock code . Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. ⢠PUK and PUK2 codes (8 digits) - The PUK (Personal Unblocki ng Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied w ith th e SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone for the codes. You can change the following codes: lock co de, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . Note: Avoid using access codes similar to the e mergency numbers, such as 112, to prevent accidental dial ling of the emergency number. PIN code request - Wh en the PIN code request is acti ve, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Note that deac tivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code / PIN2 code / Lock code - Open this setting if you want to change the code. Tip! To lock the phone man ually, press . A list of commands opens. Se lect Lock phone . Autolock period - You can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. Key in a number for the time-out in minutes or select None to turn off the autolock period. ⢠To unlock the phone, key in the lock code.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 40 Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Lock if SIM changed - Select Yes if you want the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into yo ur phone. The phone ma intains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. To view the list of Fixed dialling numbers, go to Menu â SIMâ Fixed dialling . Fixed dialling - You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. When this function is active, you can only call those phone numbe rs that are included in the fixed dialling list or which begin with the same digi t(s) as a phone number on the list. Options in the Fixed dialling view: Open , Call , New contact , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Help , and Exit . Note: When Fixed Dialling is set on, calls may be p ossible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). ⢠To add new numbers to the F ixed dialling list, select Options â New contact or Add from Contacts . Closed user group (network service) - You can specif y a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. For more informatio n, contact your network operator or service provider. Select: Default to activate the default group agreed on with the network operator, On if you want to use another group (you need to know the group index number), or Off . Note: When calls are limited to Closed User Groups, calls may be poss ible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Confirm SIM services (network service) - To set the ph one to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 41 Certif. management Options in the certificate management main view: Certificate details , Del ete , Trust settings , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . In the Certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phon e. Press to see a list of us er certificates, if available. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to veri fy the origin of browser pages and installed software. Ho wever, they can only be trusted if the origin of the cert ificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates are needed if you: ⢠want to connect to an online bank or anothe r site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information, or Glossary: Authority certificates are used by some services, such as banking services, for checking signatures or server certificates or other authority certificates. ⢠want to mini mise the risk o f viruses or ot her malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when dow nloading and installing software. Important: Note, however , that even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and softwa re installation cons iderably s maller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correc t, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Glossary: User certificat es are issued to users by a Certifying Authority. Viewing certificate details - checking authenti city You can only be sure of the correct identity of a browser gateway or a server when the signature and the period of validity of a browse r gateway or server ce rtificate have been checked. You will be notified on the phoneâÂÂs display: ⢠if the identity of the browser serv er or gateway is not authentic or ⢠if you do not have the correct security certificat e in your phone.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 42 To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate and select Option s â Cert ificate details . When you open certificate details, Certificat e management checks the validity of the certificate and one of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not trusted - You have not set any a pplicat ion to use the certificate. For more information, see the next section â Changing the trust settings of an authority certificate â . ⢠Expired certificate - The period of v alidity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet - The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted - T he certificate cannot be used . Contact the certificate issuer. Important: Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificat e or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certificate sh ould be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. Changing t he trust se ttings of an authority certificate ⢠Scroll to an authority certificate and select Options â Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that ca n use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Services / Yes - the certificate is able to certify sites. Application manager / Yes - the certificate is able to certify the origin of new software. Internet / Yes - the certificate is able to ce rtify e-mail and imag ing servers. Important: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 43 Call barring (network service) Call barring allows you t o restrict the making and receiving of calls with your phone. For this function, you need the barring passwo rd, which you can obtain from your ser v ice provider. 1 Scroll to one of the barring options. 2 Select Options â Activate to request the network to set call restriction on, Cancel to set the selected call restrict ion off, or Check status to check if the calls ar e barred or not. ⢠Select Options â Edit barrings passw. to change the barring password. ⢠Select Options â Cancel all barrings to cancel all active call barrings. Note: When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Note: Call barring affects all ca lls , including data calls. Note: You cannot have barring of incoming calls and call diverting or fixed dialling active at the same time. See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 or âÂÂFixed diallingâÂÂ, p. 40 . Network Network selection ⢠Choose Automatic to s et the phone to automatically search for and select one of the cellular network s available in your area, or
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 44 Glossary: Roaming agreement - An agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. ⢠Choose Manual , if you want to select the desi red network manually from a list of networks. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to select a network again. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display ⢠Select On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellula r network based on Micro Cellular Network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Accessory settings Indicators shown in standby mode: - a headset is connected. - a loopset is connected. Scroll to an accessory folder and open the settings: ⢠Select Default profile to select the profile you want to be activated each time when you connect a certain accessory to your phone. See â Profiles â , p. 99 . ⢠Select Automatic answer to set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after five seconds time. If the Incoming call alert is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer cannot be in us e. Note: If you are usi ng a loopset, you need to activate it separately. Open the Loopset folder and select Use loopset â Yes . If you have activated a loopset, the headset will use the same settings as the loopset.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 45 4. Contacts To open Contacts, press in standby mode or go to Menu â Contacts . In Contacts, you can store and manage cont act information, such as names, phone numbers, and addresses. See Fig. 1 , p. 45 . Contacts use shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . You can also add a personal ringing tone, vo ice tag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can create cont act groups, which allo w you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. Glossary: Voice tags can be any spoken words, for example, a personâÂÂs first name. Voice tags allow you to make phone ca lls simply by saying the word aloud. Creating contact cards 1 Open Contacts and select Options â New contact . An empty contact card opens. 2 Fill in the fields you want and press Done . The contact card is saved in the phone memory and closed, after which you can see it in the Contacts directory. Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SI M card to your phone, go to Menu â SIM â SIM directory . Se lect the name(s) you want to copy and select Options â Copy to Contacts . ⢠If you want to copy a phone, fax, or pa ger number from Contacts to your SIM card, go to Contacts, open a contact card, scroll to the number, and select Options â Copy to SIM direct. Fig. 1 The contacts directory.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 46 Editing contact cards Options in the Contacts directory: Open , Call, Create message , New contact , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/Unmark , Send , Contacts info , Help , and Exit . 1 In the Contacts directory, scroll to the contac t card you want to edit and press to open it. 2 To change the information on the card, select Options â Edit. 3 To save yo ur change s and to r eturn to th e contact card view, p ress Done . Deleting contact cards ⢠In the Contacts directory, scroll to the contact card you want to delete and selec t Options â Delete . To delete many contact cards 1 Mark the cards to be deleted. Scroll to a contact you want to delete and select Options â Mark . A check mark is placed next to the contact card. Options when editing a contact card: Add thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . 2 When you have marked all the cont acts you want to delete, select Options â Delete . Tip! You can also ma rk many items if you press and h old and simultaneously press . See also â Actions common to all applications â , p. 13 . Adding and removing contact card fields 1 Open a contact card and selec t Options â Edit . 2 To add an extra field, select Options â Add detail. To delete a field you do not need, select Options â Delete detail . To rename a contact card field label, select Options â Edit label . Inserting a picture to a contact card There are two different types of pictur es you can add to a contact card. See â Camera and Images â , p. 53 for more information on how to take and store pictures.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 47 ⢠To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open a contact card, select Options â Edit and then select Options â Add thumbnail . See Fig. 2 , p. 47. The thumbnail image is also shown when the contact is calling you. Note: After you attach a thumbnai l image to a contac t card, you can selec t Add thumbnail to replace the image with a different thumbnail or Remove thumbnail to remove the thumbnail from the contact card. ⢠To add an image to a contact card, open a contact card, an d press to open the Image view ( ). To attach an image, select Options â Add image . Viewing a contact card Contact information view ( ) shows all inform ation inserted in the contact card. Press to open the Image view ( ). Note: Only fields that have info rmation ar e displayed in the contact information view. Select Options â Edit if you want to see all fiel ds and add more data to the contact. Options when viewing a contact card when the selection is on a phone number: Call , Create message , Edit , Delete , Default s , Add voice tag / Voice tags , Assign speed dial / Remove speed dial , Ringing tone , Copy to SIM direct. , Send , Help , and Ex it . Assigning default numbers and addresses If a contact has several phone numbers or e- mail addresses, to speed up c alling and sending messages, you can define certain num bers and addresses to be used as the default. ⢠Open a contact card and select Options â Defaults . A pop-up window opens, listing the different options. Example: Scroll to Phone number and press Assign . A list of phone numbers in the selected co ntact card is shown. Scroll to the one you want to have as the default and press . When you return back to the contact card view, you can see the default number underlined. See Fig. 2 , p. 47 . Fig. 2 The contact information view
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 48 Voice dialling You can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact c ard. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialling, no te that: ⢠Voice tags are not language dependent. They are dependent on the speaker 's voice. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to back ground nois e. Record them and mak e calls in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Example: You can use a personâÂÂs name for a voice tag, for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs mobileâÂÂ. Note: You must say the name exactly as you sa id it when you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for example, a noisy enviro nment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voic e dialling in all circumstances. Adding a voice tag to a phone number Note: Voice tags can only be added to ph one numbers stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory. See â Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory â , p. 45 . 1 In the Contacts directory, scroll to the co ntact to which you want to add a voice tag and press to open the contact card. 2 Scroll to the number to which you want to add the voice tag and select Optio ns â Add voice tag . Note: You can have only one voice tag per contact card. 3 The text Press Start, then speak a fter tone is displayed. Tip! To view a list of voice tags you have defined, select Options â Contacts info â Voice tags in the Contacts directory. When recording, hold the phone at a short distance away from your mouth. After the starting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voice tag. ⢠Press Start to record a voice tag. The phone so unds a starting tone and the note Speak no w is displayed. 4 After recording, the phone plays the recorded tag and the note Playing voice tag is displayed. If you do not want to save the reco rding, pres s Quit .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 49 5 When the voice tag has been su ccessfully saved, the note Voice tag saved is displayed and a beep sounds. A symbol can be seen next to the number in the contact card. Note: Your phone may have 25 phone num bers to which voice tags are attached. If the memory becomes full, delete some of the voice tags. Making a call by saying a voice tag Note: You must say the voice tag exactly as you said it when you recorded it. 1 In standby mode, press and hold . A short tone is played and the no te Speak now is displayed. 2 When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudspeak er is in use. Hold the phone at a short distance away from yo ur mouth and face and say the voice tag clearly. 3 The phone plays the original voice tag, di splays the name and number, and after 1 .5 seconds dials the number of the recognised voice tag. ⢠If the phone plays the wrong voice ta g or to retry voice dialling, press Retry . Note: When an application using a data call or GPRS connection is sending or receiving data, you cannot make a call by us ing voic e dialling. To make a call by using a voice tag, end all active data connections. Replaying, erasing, or changing a voice tag To replay, erase, or change a voice tag, ope n a contact card and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indicated by ) and select Options â Voice tags â then either ⢠Playback - to listen to the voice tag again, or ⢠Delete - to erase the voice tag, or ⢠Change - to record a new voice tag instead of the old one. Press Start to record. Assigning speed dialling keys Speed dialling is a quick way to call freque ntly used numbers. You can assign speed dialling keys to eight phone numbers. Number 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 50 1 Open the contact card for which you want a speed dialling key and select Options â Assign spee d dial . The speed dialling grid opens, showing you the numbers from 1 -9 . See Fig. 3 , p. 50 . 2 Scroll to a number and press Assign . When you return to the contact information view, you can see the speed dial icon next to the nu mb er. See Fig. 2 , p. 47 . ⢠To call the contact by speed dialling, go to standby mode and press the speed dialling key and . Adding a ringing tone for a contact card or group You can set a ringing ton e for each contact ca rd and group. When that contact or group member calls you, the phone plays the chos en ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognises it). 1 Press to open a contact card or go to th e Groups list and select a contact g roup. 2 Select Options â Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Use the scroll key to select the ringing tone you wish to use for the contact or group and press Select . ⢠To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Note: For an individual contact, the phone will always use the ringing tone that was assigned last. S o, if you first change a group ringing tone and then the ringing tone of a single contact that belongs to that group, the ringing tone of the single contact will be used when the contact calls you the next time. Fig. 3 The speed dialling grid
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 51 Sending contact information Glossary: When you send or receive contact information, the term âÂÂbusiness cardâ is used. A business card is a contact card in a format suitable to be sent in a text message, usually in âÂÂvCardâ format. 1 In the Contacts directory, scroll to the card you want to send. 2 Select Options â Send then select the meth od, the choices are: Via text message , Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place), via Infrared , or via Bluetooth . The contact card you want to send has now become a âÂÂbusiness cardâÂÂ. For further informa tion, see the â Messaging â chapter, â Sending and receiving data via infrared â , p. 137 , and â Sending data via Bluetoothâ , p. 133 . ⢠You can add received business cards to your Contacts directory. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 for further information. Managing contact groups Options in the Groups list view: Open , Ne w group , Delet e , Rename , Ri nging tone , Contacts info , He lp , and Exit . You can create contact groups, which can, for example, be used as distribution lists for sending text messages and e-mail. See also p. 50 for how to add a ringing tone for a group. Creating contact groups 1 In the Contacts directory, pr ess to open the Groups list. 2 Select Options â New group . See Fig. 4 , p. 52 . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group and press OK . Adding members to a group 1 In the Contacts directory, sc roll to the cont act you want to add to a group and select Options â Add to gr oup: . A list of available groups opens. 2 Scroll to the group to w hich you want to add the contact and press .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 52 Adding multiple members at a time 1 In the Groups list, ope n a group and select Options â Add members. 2 Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. Re peat this action on all the contacts you want to add and press OK to add them to the selected group. Removing members from a group 1 Go to the Groups list, scroll to the group you want to modify , and press . 2 Scroll to the contact you want to remove and select Options â Remove from group. 3 Press Yes to remove the contact from the group. Importing data from other Nokia phones You can move calendar, contacts and to-do da ta from many different Nokia phones to your Nokia 3660 using the PC Suite for Nokia 3 660 Data Import applica tion. Instructions for using the application can be found in the PC Suite online help on the CD-ROM. Fig. 4 Creating a contact group.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 53 5. Camera and Images Press Camera in standby mode or go to Menu â Camera . With the camera you can take pictures of people or events while on the move. The pictures are automatica lly saved in the Images applicat ion, where you can rename them and organise them in folders. You can also se nd photos to your friends in a multimedia message, as an e-mail a ttachment, or v ia a Bluetooth or infrared connect ion. The camera produces JPEG pictures. Options before taking a picture: Capture , Go to Images , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Glossary: JPEG is a standardised image compression format. JPEG files can be viewed with the most common image viewers, image editors, and Internet browsers. You can recognise thes e files by their JPG extension. Taking pictures Note: Obey all local laws governing the tak ing of pictures. Do not use this feature illegally. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. 1 Press Camera in standby mode. The Camera application opens and you can see the view to be captured. In Fig. 1 , p. 53 , you can see the viewfinder and the cropping lines, which show you the image area to be captured. You can also see the image counter, which shows you how many images, depending on the selected im age quality, fit in the memory of your phone. 2 To take a picture, press . Fig. 1 Finding a view to capture.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 54 Note: Do not move the phone before the Ca mera application st arts to save the photo. The photos are saved automa tically in the Images application. After the image has be en saved: ⢠If you do not want to save the photo in the Images application, select Options â Delete . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . Options after a picture has been taken: New image , Delete , Send, Rename image , Go to Images , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠You can insert an image into a contact card. See â Inserting a picture to a contact card â , p. 46 . Note: Camera goes into battery saving mode if there have been no key presses within a minute. To continue taking pictures, press . Settings In the Camera application settings, you can adjust the image qua lity setting and change the default image name. Example: If you set âÂÂBeachâ as the default image name, Camera will name all the pictures you take âÂÂBeachâÂÂ, âÂÂBeach(01)âÂÂ, âÂÂBeach(02)âÂÂ, and so on, until you change the setting again. 1 Select Options â Settings. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change: ⢠Image quality - High , Normal , and Basic . The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. See also â Images and memory consumption â , p. 56 . ⢠Default image name - By default, Camera name s photos in the format â Image .jpgâÂÂ. Default image name allows you to set a name for the pictures taken. See the example in the side of the page. ⢠Memory in use - Select whether you want to store your images in the phone memory or the memory card, if you use one.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 55 Camera mode affects image size a nd orientation Tip! Try out the different Camera modes to see how they affect the picture taken. With the different Camera modes, you can affe ct the size and orientation of the picture to be taken. See Fig. 2 , p. 55 . When you are taking a picture, press or to change between the different modes. Choose: ⢠Standard when you want to take normal landscape pictures, ⢠Portrait when you want to take a smaller ico n -sized, vertical picture, which can be added to a contact card, or ⢠Night when the lighting is dim and the Came ra needs a longer exposure time for the picture to be of good quality. Note that , in dim conditions, any movement while taking a picture ma y cause it to get blurred. The image size and orientation is t he same for Sta ndard and Night . Glossary: Resoluti on - A measure for the sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolution refers to the number of dots (pixels) in an image or a display. The more pixels there are, the more detailed the picture is. Resolution is usually measured in pixels, for example, 640x480=300 kilopixels (kpix)=0.3 megapixels (Mpix). Fig. 2 Standard, Portrait, and Night modes ⢠When you are taking a picture in Standard or Night mode, the viewfinder resolution is 160x120 pixels and 80x96 for Portrait mode. ⢠The images taken in Standard or Night mo de are sa ved in 640x480 pixel (VGA) format and those taken in Portrait mode are saved in 80x96 pixel format.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 56 ⢠When you are viewing images, they are scal ed to fit the display, which has 176x208 pixels. This means that Standard and Nigh t mode pictures will appear more detailed when viewed on a higher resolution screen, for example, a computer or when zoomed in Images. Images and memory consump tion Your phone has approxima tely 3 MB (megab ytes) of free memory for images, contact information, calendar, messages, and so on. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Portrait images (always taken in High qu ality) are so small that they ta ke up very little memory . Images taken using the High quality setting and thos e taken in Night mode take up the most memory. If 1 M B o f m e m o r y is u s e d fo r i m a g e s o n l y , it would fit approximately 22 Normal quality images taken in Standard mode. In the tabl e b elow, you can see approximately how many images would fit in 1 MB of memory. Tip! By using a memory card with you r phone you can increase the number of images you can store. Image quality Image type Basic Normal High Standard 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18 Portrait --> 3 0 0
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 57 Images - Storing pictures Go to Menu â Images . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Images allows you to view, organise, delete, an d send photos and pictures stored in your phone. In Images you can organise images: Options in Images: Open , Send , Image uploader , Delet e , Move to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Receive via infrared (only from a digital camera that supports the IrTran-P protocol, otherwise use the â Infrared connection â , see p. 136 ), View details , Add to Favouri tes , Update thumbnails , Help , and Exit . ⢠taken with the camera, ⢠sent to your Inb ox in a multimedia or a pi cture message, as an e-mail attachment, via an infrared or Bluetooth connection. After receiving the image in Inbox, you need to save it in Images. In Fig. 3 , p. 58 , you can see the Images main view, a lis t of photos and folders. In the list you can see: ⢠the date and time a photo or an image was taken or sav ed, ⢠a small thumbnail picture, a preview of the image, ⢠the number of items inside a folder , and ⢠a tab showing whether the photos or folder s are located in the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if you use one. Viewing images Note: When you open Image s and you use a memory card, the starting tab is determined by which memory is selected as the Memory in use . 1 Press or to move from one memory tab to another. 2 To browse the images, press and .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 58 Options when viewing an image: Send , Rotate , Zoom in , Zoom out , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View details , Add to Favourites , Help , and Exit . 3 Press , to open an image. When the image is open, you can see the name of the image and the number of im ages in th e fold er on the top of the display. When you are viewing an image, pressing or takes you to the next or previous picture in the current folder. You can view animated GIF files in the same way as other images. Animations are played only once. When an animation stops, you will see a fixed image. To view the animation again, you must close it and then reopen it. Zooming 1 Select Options â Zoom in or Zoom out . You can see the zooming ratio at the top of the display, see Fig. 4 , p. 59 . See also section â Keyboard shortcutsâ later in this chapter. 2 Press Back to return to the initial view. Note: The zoom ratio is not stored permanently. Note: You cannot zoom in on GIF anim ations while they are playing. Full screen When you select Options â Full screen , the panes around the picture are removed so that you can see more of the image. Press to go back to the initial view. Moving the focus When you are zooming or viewing an image in full screen mode, use the scroll key to move the focus to the left, right, up, or down, so that y ou can take a closer look at one part of the picture, for example, its upper right corner, as in Fig. 4 , p. 59 . Rotating Select Options â Rotateâ Left to rotate an image 90 degrees anticlockwise or Right to rotate the image clockwise. The rotati on status is not stor ed permanent ly. Fig. 3 The Images main view
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 59 Keyboard shortcuts ⢠Rotate: - anticlockwise, - clockwi se ⢠Scroll: - up, - down, - left, - right ⢠- zoom in, - zoom out, press and hold to return to the normal view. ⢠- change between full screen and normal view. Image details view ⢠To view the detailed information about an image, scroll to the image and select Options â View details . A list of image information appears: Format - JPEG , GIF , PNG , TIFF, MBM, BMP , WBMP , OT A , WMF , Unsupported , or Unknown . Date and Time - when the image was created or saved, Resolutn. - the size of the image in pixels, see the glossary explanation, p. 55 , Size - in bytes or kilobytes (kb), Colour - True colour , 65536 colours , 4096 colours , 256 colours , 16 colours , Greyscale , or Black/white . Arranging images and folders ⢠To remove an image or folder, scroll to it and select Options â Delete . ⢠To rename an image or a fold er, scroll to th e image or folder you want to rename and select Op tions â Rename . Write the new name and press . See â Actions common to all applications â , p. 13 for further information on how to create folders and mark and mo ve items to folders . Fig. 4 Zooming in and moving the focus
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 60 Sending images Tip! You can send several images a t a time via infrared or Bluetooth. To send several ima ges at a time you need to mark them first. To mark several images a t a time use the Options â Mark/Un mark commands or press and hold and at the same time press or . As the selection moves, a check mark is placed next to the images. To end the selection, stop the scroll key and then release . You can send photos or images via different messaging services. 1 Scroll to the image you want to send and select Options â Send . 2 Then select the method, the choices are Via multimedia , Via e-mail , Via infrared , and Via Bluetooth . ⢠If you select to send the image in an e-mail or a multimedia message, an edit or opens. Press to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts direc tory or write the phone number or e-mail addr ess of the recipient in the To : field. Add text or sound and select Options â Send . For more information, see â Creating and sending new messag es â , p. 74 . ⢠If you want to send the image via infrared or Bluetooth, see â Sending data via Bluetooth â , p. 133 , and â Sending and receiv ing data via infraredâ , p. 137 for more information. Picture messages folder Options in the Picture messages folder: Open , Send , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Rename , View details , Help , and Exit . In the Picture messages folder, you can find gra phics sent to you in picture messages. If you want to save a graphic you ha ve received in a picture message, go to Messagin g â Inbox , open the m essage, a nd select Options â Save picture . Viewing pictures 1 Scroll to the picture you want to view and press . The picture opens. Press to view the next picture in the folder. 2 Press Back to return to the Pictures main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Video recorder 61 6. Video recorder Go to Menu â Video recorder . Note: Obey all local laws gover ning the taking of vide os. Do not use this feature illegally. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the Video recorder. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. With the Video recorder you can record video clips, and play video clips stored on your phone or on a memory card. Also, the Video recorder is integrated with th e messaging features allowing you to easily send created clips. Video recorder uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Recording a video clip You can record video clips up to 95 kB in si ze, or approximately 10 seconds in duration. Recorded video clips are in the .3gp format. Glossary: 3GPP file format (.3gp) is the standard video file format for Multimedia Messaging. 1 To begin recording open the Video recorder and select Options â Record and you can see the view to record. See Fig. 1 , p. 61 . 2 To start recording press . The progress bar on the bottom of the sc r een shows you how much recording time remains. To pause recording at any time press . To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, press . Fig. 1 Recording a video clip
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Video recorder 62 The video clip is saved to either the phoneâ s memory or the memory card, depending on the setting of your Memory in use . See â Setting up your Video recorder â , p. 62 . Options in video clip view of Video recorder: Play , Record , Send , Delete , Rename , Settings , About product , Help , and Exit . Watching a video clip To watch a video clip from the Video recorder video clip list: 1 Open the Video recorder. 2 Scroll to a video clip and select Options â Play . See Fig. 2 , p. 62 . Once a video clip is playing, you have s imila r options available to you as when pl aying a video clip in â RealOne Player⢠â . See â RealOne Playerâ¢â , p. 63 . Sending video clips You can send video clips by using the Send option from your video clip list. 1 Scroll to the video clip you want to send and select Options â Send . 2 Select one of the four ways you have of sending your video clip, Via multimedia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Setting up your Video recorder You can define whether you stor e your vide o clips in the phoneâÂÂs memory or on the memory card, if you have on e, and how to name your video clips. Select Options â Settings and you have: ⢠Memory in use - Choose between Phone memory and Memory card. ⢠Default video name - Define the default name of your video clips. Example: If you set âÂÂHolidayâ as the default video clip name, Video recorder will name all the video clips y ou take âÂÂHoliday âÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(01)âÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(02)âÂÂ, and so on, until you change the setting again. Fig. 2 Video clip list
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. RealOne Player⢠63 7. RealOne Player⢠Go to Menu â RealOne Player . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. With the RealOne Player⢠you can play media files stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory or on a memory card, or play music and video file s and stream live content from the Internet. Glossary: Media files are video, music or audi o clips which you can play on a media player like the RealOne Player . Files wi th extensio ns .3gp, .amr, . mp4, .rm, .ram, .ra and .rv. are supported by the RealOne Player. RealOne Player does not necessarily support all the variations of all file formats supported. For example, RealOne Player will attempt to open all .mp4 files. However, some .mp4 files may incl ude content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and therefore is not supported by the Nokia 3660 phon e. In this case, the operation might fail and result in partial playba ck or in an error me ssage. RealOne Player uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Options: See adjacent list. The Options menu shows different availability options as follows: ⢠When the list has no file s, links, or folders: Open , New folder, Settings , About product, Help and Exit . ⢠When the selected item is a local file: Play , Open, Rename (if no items are m arked), Delete , New folder , Move to folder , Mark/U nmark , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , About product , Help and Exit . ⢠When the selected item is a network link: Play (if no items are marked), Open , Rename , Edit link , Delete , New folder , Move to folder , Mark/Unmark , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , About product , Hel p and Exit .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. RealOne Player⢠64 ⢠When a folder is highlighted: Open folder (if no items are marked), Open , Rename (if no items are marked), Delete , New folder, Mark/Unmark, Settings, About product, Help and Exit . ⢠When many items are selected: Open , Delete, New folder , Move t o folder , Mark /Unmark , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , About product , Help and Exit . Media Guide From your RealOne Player you can open a br owser page containing a Media Guide with links to streaming media sites and files. See â Streaming from the Internet â , p. 65 . Playing media files You can play any music or video file from the list shown when you start the RealOne Player, or directly from the Internet. Fig. 2 Playing a local media file ⢠To play a media file stored in your phoneâÂÂs memory or memory card, open RealOne Player, scroll to the file and select Options â Play . See Fig. 1 , p. 64 , and Fig. 2 , p. 64 . Fig. 1 Mus ic and video clip list
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. RealOne Player⢠65 Glossary: Streaming is playing sound or video in real time as it is downloaded from the Internet, as opposed to storing it in a local file first. ⢠To play a media file directly from the Internet: 1 Select Options â Open â URL address . 2 Enter the URL of the site you want to play or stream content from. Note: You cannot connect to a site u n less yo u have configured a n Access Point, see Default Access Point setting, p. 67 . Many service providers will require y ou to use an Internet Access Point (IAP) for your Default Access Point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access po int. Contact y our service provider for advice and availability. Note: In the RealOne Player, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. You cannot open an http:// URL address, however RealOne Player will recognise an http link to a .ram file since a .ram file is a text file containi ng an rtsp link . Streaming from the Internet ⢠To stream live content fr om the Internet (network service ) , firstly configure your Default Access Po int, see No te, p. 65 . Then: 1 Open RealOne Player and select Options â Open â Guide . Open the Media Guide to find a link to a streaming site which interests you. 2 Select the link. You are prompted to disconnect the WAP access point. ⢠If you have configured an Internet Access Point (IAP) as your Default Access Point in RealOne Player (with the agreem ent of your service provider), accept the prompt. ⢠If you have configured a WAP access point a s your Default Access Point in RealOne Player (with the agreement of your service provider), decline the prompt. Your streaming session should now begin. Before your media file or s tream begins play ing, your phone will connect to the site and load the file. See Fig. 3 , p. 66 . For further information about setting up your Nokia 3660 phone for str eaming with RealOne Player, please visit http://www.nokia.com/phones/3660/ support .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. RealOne Player⢠66 Glossary: Buffering is the temporary storage of a part of your streaming content into the phoneâÂÂs memory before itâÂÂs played. Fig. 3 Streaming a media file from the In ternet; connecting, buffering then playing Volume control ⢠To increase the volume press , or to decrease the volume press . ⢠To mute the sound press and hold until the indicator is displayed. ⢠To turn on the sound press and hold until you see the indicator, see Fig 2 , p. 64 . Sending media files You can send media files by usin g the Send option from your video clip list. 1 Scroll to the file you want to send and select Options â Send . 2 Select one of the four ways you have of sending your file, via Via infrared , Via Bluetooth , Via multimedia or Via e-mail .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. RealOne Player⢠67 Changing the settings Tip! When you select one of the settings a tab view is opened. Press or to move between the different setting tabs. The following icons indicate which setting you are in: for Video for Playback for Network , and for Proxy . To change the Video settings, select Options â Settings â Video to open the following list of settings: ⢠Video quality - Choose Sharp images to have better picture quality, but slower framerate, or High framerate for faster framerate, but lower picture quality. ⢠Automatic scaling - Choose On to have automatic resizing of the video image. To change the Playback settings, select Options â Set tings â Playback to open the following setting: ⢠Repeat - Choose On to have the playing video or audi o file restart automatically once it has finished. To change the Network settings, select Options â Settings â Network to open the following list of settings: ⢠Default Access Point - As defined in Connection settings , see â Access po ints â , p. 34 . See also the guidance in Step 2, p. 65 . ⢠Bandwidth - Choose Auto matic to have the best delivery rate available. ⢠Maximum bandwidth - Choose the maximum ban d wi dth for streaming content. ⢠Connection time-out - Open the slider view to change the waiting time for the initial server connection on a streaming session. ⢠Server time-out - Open the slider view to change the time allowed for no response from the server. ⢠Highest Port and Lowest Port - Enter the port numbers for streaming. I f you are not sure of the numbers, contact your service provider. To change the Proxy settings, select Options â Settings â Proxy to open the following list of settings: ⢠Use Proxy / Host address / Port - Choose whether a proxy is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 68 8. Messaging Go to Menu â Messaging . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Messaging folder. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . In Messaging you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organise: ⢠text messages, Options in the Messaging main view: Create message , Connect (s hown if you have defined settings for the mailbox), or Disconnect (shown if there is an active connection to mailbox), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service commands , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠multimedia messages, ⢠e-mail messages, and ⢠smart messages, special text messages containing data. In addition to these, you can receive messages and data via an infrared or Bluetooth connection, receive service messages, cell broadcast messages as well as send service commands. Text and multimedia messages use shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . When you open Messaging, you can see the Create message function and a list of default folders: Inbox - contains received messages excep t e-mail and cell broa dcast messages. E- mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . You can read cell broadcast messa ges by selecting Options â Cell broadcast. My folders - for organising your messages into folders. Tip! Organise your messages by adding new folders under My folders. Mailbox - When you open this folder, you can either connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. See p. 86 for further info rmation on onlin e and offline modes. After you have defined settings for a new mailbox, the name given to that mailbox w ill replace Mailbox in the main view. See â Settings for e-mail â , p. 96 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 69 Drafts - stores draft messages that have not been sent . Outbox - is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Sent - stores the last 15 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see â Settings for the Other folder â , p. 98 . Reports - you can request the ne twork to send you a delivery report of the text messages, smart messages, an d multimedia messages you have sent. To turn on delivery report reception, select Options â Settings â Text message or Multimedia message , scroll to Receive report , and select Yes . Tip! When you have opened one of the default folders, for example, Sent , you can easily move between the folders: by pressing to open the next folder ( Outbox ), or by pressing to open the previous folder ( Drafts ). Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multim edia message that has been sen t to an e-mail address might not be possible. Note: Before you can create a multimedia me ssage, write an e-mail, or connect to your remote mailbox, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See â Settings needed for e-mail â , p. 80 and â Settings needed for multimedia messaging â , p. 77 . Messaging - General information The message status is always ei ther draft, sent, or received. Messages can be saved to the Drafts folder before they are sent. Messages are temporarily placed to Outbox to wait for sending. After a message has been sent, you can find a copy of the message in the Sent folder. Received and sent messages are in read-only state until you select Reply or Forward , which copies the message to an editor . Note that you cannot forward e-mail messages you yourself have sent. Note: Messages or data that have been sent via an infrared or Bluetooth connection are not saved in the Draft o r Sent folders.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 70 Opening a received message ⢠When you r eceive a mess age, and the note 1 new me ssage is shown in standby mode. Press Show to open the message. ⢠If you have more than one new message, pr ess Show to open the Inbox to see the message headings. To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it and press . Adding a recipient to a message When you create a message, th ere are several ways to add a recipient: ⢠add recipients from the Contacts directory. To open the Contacts directory, p ress or in the To: or Cc: fields, or select Options â Add recipient . Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. Press OK to return to the message. The reci pients are listed in the To: field and automatically separated with a semicolon ( ; ). Example: 44 123 456 ; 050 456 876 ⢠write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To: field, or ⢠copy the recipient information from anothe r application and then paste it to the To: field. See â Copying text â , p. 73 . Press to delete a recipient to the left of the cursor. Note: If you write many phone numbers or e-mail addresses in the To: field, you must remember to add a semicolon ( ; ) between each item to separate them from each other. When you retrieve recipien ts from the Contacts direct ory, the semicolon is added automatically. Sending options To change how a messa ge is sent, select Option s â Send ing options when you are editing a message. When you save the message, its sending settings are also saved.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 71 Writing text Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly when writing text. You can key in text in two different ways, us ing the method traditionally used in mobile phones or another method called predictive text input. Using traditional text input The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( - ), repeatedly until the desired character appears. Note, that there are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. Icons: and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the next word is written in upper case, and all other letters will automatically be written in lower case. indicat es number mode. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same ke y as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and then key in the letter. ⢠If you make a mistake, press to remove a character. Press and hold to clear more than one ch aracter. ⢠The most common punctuat ion marks are available und er . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press to open a list of special charac te rs. Use the scroll key to move through the list and press Select to select a character . ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between upper and lower case, press . Using predictive text input To activate predictive text input, press and select Dictionary on . This will activate predictive text input for all editors in the phone. The indicator is shown at the top of the display.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 72 1 Write the desired word by pressing the keys - . Press each key only once for one letter. The word changes after every key press. Note: Do not pay attention to what appears on the display. The word match is evolving, wait until you have keyed in the whole word before you check th e result. For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when En glish dictionary is selected , press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a. As you can see in Fig. 1 , p. 72 , the word suggestion changes after each key press. 2 When you have finished the word, ch eck that it is correct. ⢠If the word is correct, you can confirm it by pressing or by pressing to insert a space. The underlining disappears and you can begin to write a new word. ⢠If the word is not correct, you have the following options: ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matchi ng words th e dictionary has found one by one. ⢠Press and select Dictionary â Matches to view a list of matching words. Scroll to the word you want to use and press to select it. ⢠If the ? character is shown after the word, t he word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, press Spell , key in the word (max. 32 letters) using traditional text i nput, and press OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes fu ll, a new word replaces the oldest added word. ⢠To remove the ? and clear characters one by one from the word, press . Tips on using predictive text input ⢠To erase a charac ter, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. ⢠To change between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . Note that if you press quickly twice the pred ictive text input is turned off. ⢠To insert a number in letter mo de, pr ess and hold the desired number key. Fig. 1 Predictive text input
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 73 Or press and select Insert number , key in the numbers you want, and press OK . To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠The most common punctuation marks ar e available under . Press and then repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. Use the scroll key to scroll through the list and press Select to select a character. Or press and select Insert symbol . Tip! The predictive text input will try to g uess which commonly used punctuat ion mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the diction ary. ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. You can also press , select Dictionary and select ⢠Matches - to view a list of words that corre spond to your key presses. Scroll to the desired word and press the . ⢠Insert word - to add a word (max. 32 letters ) to the dictionary by us ing tradit ional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word . ⢠Edit word - to open a view w here you ca n edit the wor d, available only if the wor d is active (underlined). Writing compo und words ⢠Write the first half of a compound word an d confirm it by pressing . Write the last part of the compound word and complete the compound word by pressing to add a space. Turning predictive tex t input off ⢠Press and select Dictionary â Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. Copying text If you want to copy text to the clipbo ard, the following are the easiest methods: 1 To select letters and words, press and hold . At t he same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 74 To select lines of text, press and ho ld . At the same time press or . 2 To end the selection, stop pressing the scroll key (whi le still holding ). 3 To copy the text to clipboa rd, while still holding , press Copy . Or, release and then press it once to open a list of editing commands, for example, Copy or Cut . If you want to remove the selected text from the document, press . 4 To insert the text into a docum ent, press and hold and press Paste . Or, press once and select Paste . Editing options When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode and situation you are in): ⢠Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode ⢠Cut , Copy - available only if text has been sele cted first. ⢠Paste - available only when text has been either cut or copied to the clipboard. ⢠Insert number , Insert symbol , and ⢠Writing language: - changes the input language fo r all editors in the phone. See â Phone settings â , p. 27 . Creating and sending new messages Note: When sending messages, your phone may display the word " Sent " . T h i s i s a n indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message centre number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destin ation. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Fig. 2 Creating a message, message types.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 75 You can start to create a message in two ways: ⢠By selecting New message â Create :â Text message , Multimedia message , or E-mail in the Messaging main view, or ⢠Start to create a message from an application that has the option Send . In this case the file that was selec ted (such as an image or text) is added to the message. Writing and sending text messages 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. See Fig. 2 , p. 74 . 2 Select Create: â Text me ssage . The editor opens with the cursor in the To: field. Press to select recipient(s) from the Contac ts directory or writ e the phone number of the recipient. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. Press to move to the message field. Options in the text message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert, Delete, Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exit . 3 Write the message. Note: Your phone supports sending of mult iple text messages at the same time, therefore, the normal 160 characte rs limit for one text message can be exceeded. If your text exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent i n two or more messages and message sending may cost y ou more. In the navigation bar, you can see the me ssage length indic ator coun ting back wards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. 4 To send the message, select Opt ions â Send or press . Sending smart messages Tip! You can also receive ringing tones, operator logos, or settings from service providers, see p. 83 . Smart messages are special text messages that can co ntain data. You can send smart messages such as: â¢p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s , ⢠business cards containing contact in formation in generic (vCar d) format, ⢠Calendar notes (vCalendar format).
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 76 For more information, see â Send ing contac t informati on â , p. 51 , â Sending calendar entri esâ , p. 105 , and â Sending bookmarks â , p. 120 . Creating and sending picture messages Your phone allows you to send and receive picture messages. Pictur e messages ar e text messages that contain s mall black-and-white gr aphics. T here are several default pictur es available in the Picture msgs. folder in Imag es . Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only phones that of fer picture message features can receive and display picture messages. To send a picture message: 1 There are two possibilities , either: ⢠Go to Images â Picture msgs. and select a picture to be sent. Select Options â Send , or ⢠Select Me ssaging â New message â Create: Text message and select Insert â Picture . 2 Enter recipient information and add text. See Fig. 3 , p. 76 . Options in the picture message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Remove picture , Delete , Message details , Help , and Exit . 3 Select Options â Send or press . Note: Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. Multimedia messages A multimedia message can contain a combination of text and video clips, or text, images and sound clips, but not a combination of images and video clips. Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only devices that of fer compatib le multimedia message or e- mail features can receive a nd display mu ltimedi a messages. Devices that donâÂÂt have these features may receive details of a link to a w eb page. Fig. 3 Editing a picture message.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 77 Settings needed for m ultimedia messaging You may receive the settings as a smart messa ge from your netw ork operator or service provider. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . Example: Domain names such as www.nokia.com can be translated into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195 . For availability of and subscrip tion to d ata services, please contact your network operator or service provider. 1 Go to Menu â Tools â Settings â Connection settin gs â Access points and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point: Connection nam e - Give a descriptive name for the conne ction. Session mode - Select a data connection type: GSM data , High speed GSM , or GPRS . Options in the multimedia message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert, Preview message , Objects , Remove , Delet e , Message details , Sending options , He lp , and Exit . Gateway IP address - enter the address, see the example in the side of the page. Homepage - enter the address of the multimedia messaging centre. ⢠If you selected GSM data or High speed GSM , fill in: Dial-up number - a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , fill in: Access point name - the name given to you by your service provider. For further information on different data connections, see also â Connection â , p. 31 . 2 Go to Messaging â Options â Settingsâ Multimedia message . Open Preferred connection and select the access point you cr eated to be used as the preferred connection. See also â Settings for mult imedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 94 . Setting up the memory in use The memory in use defines whether the phoneâ s memory or the memory card a r e used as default. To define the memory in use: â¢G o t o Messaging and select Options â Settings â Other â Memory in use and select either the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if one is used. Creating multimedia messages Note: When you are sending a multimedia message to any phone other than Nokia 3650, Nokia 3660 or Nokia 7650, it is recommended to use a smaller image
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 78 size and a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. The default sett ing is Image size : Small . If you want to check the image size setting, go to Messaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message or sel ect Options â Sending options when you are creating a multimedia mess age. When you are sending a multimedia message to an e-mail address or anot her Nokia 3650, Nokia 3660 or a Nokia 7650, if possible, use the larger image size (n etwork dependent). To change the setting, select Options â Sending options â Image sizeâ Large when you are creating a multimedia message. 1 In Messaging, select New message â Create:â Multimedia message and press . 2 Press to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To: field. Add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. Press to move to the next field. 3 You can add the different objects of the mu ltimedia mess age in any order you want. ⢠To add an image, select Op tions â Insert â Image or New image. Tip! If you are sending a multimedia me ssage to an e-mail address, it is recommended to change the image size to bigger, select Options â Sending options â Image size â Large . When sending a multimedia message to another phone, use the default size Small . ⢠To add a sound, select Options â Insert â Sound clip or New sound clip . When sound has been added, the icon is show n in the navigation bar. See Fig. 4 , p. 79 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 79 ⢠To add v ideo, se lect Option s â Insert â Video clip . ⢠To write text, press . ⢠If you select Insert â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Template , a list of items opens. Scroll to the item you wish to add and press Select . Note: If you chose Image , first you need to select whether the image is stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if one is used. ⢠If you select Insert â New image , Camera opens and you can take a new picture. Press Remove to remove the picture and take another instead. ⢠If you select Insert â New sound clip , Recorder opens and you can record a new sound. The new photo or soun d is automatica lly saved and a copy is inserted in the message. Note: A multimedia message can contain only one photo and one sound or video clip. 4 To send the message, select Opt ions â Send or press . Previewing a multimedia m essage To see what the multimedia message will look like, select Options â Preview message . Removing an object from a multimedia message To remove a multimedia object, select Options â Remove â Image Video cli p or Sound clip . Press to remove text. Working with di fferent media objects To see all the different medi a objects included in a multimedia message, open a multimedia message and select Option s â Objects to open the Objects view. In the Objects view, you can change the order of the different objects, delete objects, or open an object in a corresponding application. In Fig. 5 , p. 79 , you can see a list of differen t objects and their file sizes. Fig. 4 Creating a multimedia message Fig. 5 Multimedia objects view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 80 Options in the Objects view: Open , Insert , Place image first / Place text first , Remove , Help , and Exit . E-mail Settings needed for e-mail Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must: ⢠Configure an Internet Access Point (IAP) correctly. See â Connection â , p. 31 . ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See â Settings for e-mail â , p. 96 . Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote mailb ox and Internet Service Provider. Writing and sending e-mail messages Options in the e-mail editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Attachments , Delete , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exit . 1 Select New message â Create:â E-mail . The editor opens. 2 Press to select the recipient(s) from th e Contacts directory or write the e-mail address of the recipient in the To: field. Add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate eac h recipient. If you want to send a copy of your e- mail to someone, writ e the address in the Cc: field. Press to move to the next field. 3 Write the message. If you want to add an attachment to the e-mail, select Options â Insert â Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Note . will app ear in the navigation bar to indicate that the e-ma il has an attachment. Template adds pre-written text to the e- mail. You can also add an attachment to an e-mail by selecting Options â Attachments in an open e-mail. The Attachments view opens where you can add, view, and remove attachment s. Note: If you chose Image , first you need to select whether the image is stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if one is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 81 Tip! If you want to send files other than photos, sounds, and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application and select the option Send â Via e-mail , if available. 4 To remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and selec t Options â Re move . 5 To send the e-mail, se lect Option s â Send or press . Note: E-mail messages are automatically plac ed in Outbox before sending. In case something goes wrong while the ph one is sending the e-mail, the e-mail is left to Outbox with the status Failed . Inbox - receiving messages Options in Inbox: Open , Create message , Delete , Message details , Move to folder , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Messages and data can be received via text message or multimedia service, via an infrared, or Bluetooth connection. When there are unread in Inbox, the icon changes to . In Inbox, the message icons tell you wh at kind of a message it is . Here are some of the icons that you may see: for an unread text message and for an unread smart message, for an unread multimedia message, for an unread service message, for data received via infrared, for data received via Bluetooth, and for an unknown message type. Viewing messages in Inbox ⢠To open a message, scroll to the message and pre ss . Use the scroll key to move up and down in the message. P ress or to move to the previous or next message in the folder.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 82 Options in different message viewers The available options depend on the type of message you have opened for viewing: ⢠Save picture - saves the picture to Images â Picture msgs.. ⢠Reply - copies the address of the sender to the To: field. Select Reply â To all - to copy the address of the sender and Cc . field recipients to th e new message. ⢠Forward - copies the message contents to an editor. ⢠Call - call by pressing . ⢠View image - allows you to view and save the image. ⢠Play sound clip - allows you to listen to the sound in the message. ⢠Objects - shows you a list of all the different multimedia o bjects in a multimedia message. ⢠Attachments - shows you a list of files sent as e-mail attachments. ⢠Message details - shows detailed inform ation about a message. ⢠Move to folder / Copy to folder - allows you to move or cop y message(s) to My folders, Inbox, or other folders you have created. See âÂÂMoving items to a folderâÂÂ, p. 14 . ⢠Add to Contacts - allows you to copy the phon e number or e-mail address of the message sender to the Contacts directory. Choose whether you want to create a new contact card or add th e information to an existing contact card. ⢠Find - Searches the message for phone numbers, e-mail addresses, and Internet addresses. After the search, you can make a call or send a message to the found number or e-mail address, or save the data to Contac ts or as a browser bookmark. Viewing multimedia messages in Inbox You can recognise multimedia messages by their icon : ⢠To open a multimedia message, scroll to it and press . You can see an image, read a message and hear a sound, simultaneously. If sound is playing, press or to incr ease or decrease the sound volume. If you want to mute the sound, press Stop .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 83 Multimedia message objects Options in the Objects view: Open , Sa ve , Send , Help , and Exit . ⢠To see what kinds of media objects have be en included in the multimedia message, open the message and select Options â Objects . In the Objects view you can view files that have been included in the multimedia message. You can choose to save the file in your phone or to send it, for exa mple, via infrared t o another device. ⢠To open a file, sc roll to it and press . Example: You can open a vCar d file and save the contact information in the file to Contacts. Important: Multimedia message objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your phone or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the send er. For more information, see â Certif. management â , p. 41 . Sounds in a multimedia message Sound objects in a multimedia message are in di cated by indicator in the navigation bar. Sounds are by default played throug h the loudspeaker. To stop the sound, press Stop while sound is playing. You can change the volume level by pressing or . ⢠If you want to listen to a sound again af ter all the objects have been shown and the playing of the sound has stopped, select Options â Play sound clip . Receiving smart messages Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture wi ll be saved to Contacts as well. Your phone can receive many kinds of smart messages, text messages that contain data (also called Over-The-Air (OTA) mes sages). To open a received smart message, open Inbox, scroll to the smart message ( ) , and press . ⢠Picture message - to save the picture in the Picture msgs. folder in Images for later use, select Op tions â Save picture . ⢠Business card - to save the contact information, select Options â Save business card. Note: If certificates or so und files are atta ched to business cards, they will not be saved. ⢠Ringing tone - to sa ve the ringing tone to Composer, select Options â Save .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 84 ⢠Operator logo - to save the lo go, select Options â Save . The operator logo can now be seen in standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification. Tip! To later change the default access point settings for browser service or multimedia messaging, go to Services â Options â Settings â Default access point or Messaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message â Preferred connection . ⢠Calendar entry - to save the invitation to Calendar, select Op tions â Save to Calendar . ⢠WAP message - to save the bookmark, select Options â Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to the Bookma rks list in browser service. If the message contains both b rowser acce ss point settings and bookmarks, to save the data select Options â Save all . Or, select Options â View details to view the bookmark and access point information separate ly. If you do not want to save all data, select a setting or bookmark, o pen the details and select Options â Save to Settings or Save to bookmarks depending on what you are viewing. ⢠E-mail notification - Tells you how many new e-mails you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may lis t more deta iled information such as subject, sender, attachments, and so on. ⢠In addition, you can receive a text mess age service number, voice mailbox number, profile settings for remote synchronisatio n, access point settings for the browser, multimedia messaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings. To save the setti ngs, select Options â Save to SMS sett. , Save to Voice mail, Save to settings , Save to Setti ngs , or Save to e-mail sett. . Service messages Options when viewing a service message: Download message , Move to folder , Message details , Help , and Exit . You can order service messages (pushed me ssages) from service providers. Service messages are notifications of, for example, ne ws headlines and they may contain a text message or address of a browser service. For availabilit y and subscription, contact your service provider. Service providers can update an existing service message every time a new service message is received. Messages can be updated even if you have moved them to another folder than Inbox. When service messages expire, they are deleted automatically.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 85 Viewing service messages in Inbo x 1 In Inbox, scroll to a service message ( ) and press . 2 To download or view the service, press Download message . The note Dow n loading message is displayed. The phone starts to make a data connection, if needed. 3 Press Back to return to I nbox. Viewing service messages in the browser When you are browsing, select Options â Read service msgs. to download and view new service messages . My folders Options in My folders: Open , New message , Delete , Message details , Move to folder , New folder , Rename , Help , and Exit . In My folders you can organise your messag es into f olders, create new folder s, and rename and delete folders. Select Options â Move to folder , New folder , or Rename folder . For more information, see âÂÂMoving items to a folderâÂÂ, p. 14 . Templates f older ⢠You can use text templates to avoid rewritin g messages that you send often. To create a new template, select Options â New template . Remote mailbox When you open this folder, you can ei ther connect t o your remote mailbox: ⢠to retrieve new e- mail he adings or messages, or ⢠view your previously retrieved e-ma il headings or messages offline.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 86 Tip! The Settings wizard program included in the PC Suite for Nokia 3660 can help you configure access point and mailbox settings. You can also copy existi ng settings, for example, from your computer to your phone. See the CD- ROM supplied in the sales package. If you select New message â Create:â E-mail or Mailbox in the Messaging main view and you have not set up your e-mail account , you will be prompted to do so. See â Settings needed for e-mai l â , p. 80 . When you create a new mailbox, the name you giv e to the mailbox automatically replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You ca n have several mailboxes (max. six). Opening the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose wh ether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages an d e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server. ⢠When you scroll to your mailbox and pres s , the phone as ks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? Select Yes to connect to your mailbox or No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. ⢠Another way to start a connection is to select Options â Connect . Viewing e-mail messag es when online When you are online, you are continuously conn ected to a remote mailbox via a data call or a packet data connection. See also â Data con nection indi cators â , p. 10 , â GSM data callsâ , p. 31 , and â Packet data (Gener al Packet Radio Servic e, GPRS)â , p. 32 . Note: If you are usi ng the POP3 protocol , e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see th e newest e-mail messages, you need to disconnect and then make a new connection to your mailbox.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 87 Options when viewing e- mail headings: Open , New message , Connect / Discon nect , Retrieve , Delete , Message details , Copy , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Viewing e-mail messages when offline When you view e-mail messages offline, yo ur phone is not connected to the remote mailbox. This mode may help you to save on connection costs. See p. 31 for further information. To view e-mail messages offlin e, you must first retrieve e-mail mess ages from your mailbox, see the next section. After you have retrieved the e-mail messages to your phone, to end the data connection, select Options â Disconnect . You can cont inue reading the retrieved e- mail head ings and/or the retrieved e-mail messages offline. You can write new e-ma il messages, reply to the retrieved e-mail messages, and forward e-mail messages. You ca n order the e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e- mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query. Retrieving e-mail messages from the mailbox ⢠If you are offline, select Op tions â Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. The remote mailbox view is similar t o the In box folder in Messaging. You can move up and down in the list by pressing or . The following icons are used to show the status of the e-mail: - new e-mail (offline or online mode). The content has not been retrieved from the mailbox to y our phone (the arro w in the icon is pointing o utwards). - new e-mail, the content has been retrieved from the mailbox (arrow pointing inwards). - for e-mail messages that have been read . - f o r e - m a i l h e a d i n g s t h a t h a v e b e e n r e ad and the message content has been deleted from the phone.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 88 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Opt ions â Retrieve â â¢ New - to retrieve all new e-mail messages to your phone. ⢠Selec ted - to retrieve onl y the e-mail mess ages that have been marked. Use the Mark/Unmark â Mark / Unmark commands to select messages one by one. See p. 13 for informa tion on how to select man y items at the same tim e. ⢠All - to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To cancel retrie ving, press Cance l . 2 After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online. Select Options â Disconnect to close the connection and to view the e-mail messages offline. Copying e-mail messa ges to another folder If you want to copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders, select Options â Copy . Select a folder from the list and press OK. Options when viewing an e-mail message: Reply , Forward , Delete , Attachments , Message details , Move to folder , Add to Contacts , Find , Help , a nd Exit . Opening e-mail messages ⢠When you are viewing e-mail messages either in online or offline mode, scroll to the e-mail you want to view and press to ope n it. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline and select Open , you will be asked if you want to retrieve th is message from the mailbox. Not e that the data connection is left open after th e e-mail has been retrieved. Select Options â Disconnect to end the data connection. Disconnecting from mailbox When you are online, select Options â Disconnect to end the data call or GPRS connection to the remote mailbox. See also â Data connection indicators â , p. 10 . Fig. 6 Viewing e-mail messages.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 89 Options in the Attachments view: Open , Retrieve , Save , Send , Delete , Help , and Exit . Viewing e-mail attachments ⢠Open a message that has the atta chment indicator and select Options â Attachments to open the Attachments view. In th e Attachments view, you can retrieve, open, or save attachments. You can a lso send attachments via infrar ed or Bluetooth. Important: E-ma il attachments may contain viru ses or otherwise be harmful to your phone or PC. Do not open any at tachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. For more information, see â Certif. management â , p. 41 . Tip! To save memory, you can remove attachments from an e- mail while reta ining them on the e-mail server. Select Opt ions â Delete in the Attachments view. Retrieving attachmen ts to the phone ⢠If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the phone. To retrieve the attachment, scroll to it and select Options â Retrieve . Note: If your mailbox uses the IMAP 4 pr otocol, you can decide whether to retrieve e-mail headings only, message s only, or messages and attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headings only or messages and attachments. For further info rmation, see p. 96 . Opening an atta chment 1 In the Attachments view, scroll to an attachment and press to open it. Tip! Supported image formats are listed on p. 59 . To see a list of other file formats supported by the Nokia 3660, go and see the product information at www.nokia.com. ⢠If you are online, the attachment is retr ieved directly from the server and opened in the corresponding application. ⢠If you are offline, the phone asks if you want to retrieve the attachment to the phone. If you answer Yes , a connection to the remote mailbox is started. 2 Press Back to return to the e-mail viewer. Saving attachments separately To save an attachment, select Options â Save in the Attachments view. The at tachment is saved in the corresponding application. Fo r example, sounds can be saved in Recorder and text files (.TXT) in Notes. Note: Attachments like images can be saved on the memory card, if one is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 90 Deleting e-mail messages ⢠To delete an e-mail from the phone whil e still retaining it in the remote mailbo x. Select Options â Deleteâ Phone only. Note: The phone mirrors the e-mail head ings in the remote mailbox. So, although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your phone. If you want to remove the headin g as well, you have to first delete the e-mail message from your remote mail box and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. ⢠To delete an e-mail from both the ph one as well as from the remote mailbox. Select Options â Delete â Phone and server. Note: If you are offline, the e-mail will be deleted first from your phone. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it wil l be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the co nnec tion to the remote mailbox. Undeleting e-mail me ssages when offline To cancel deleting an e-mail from both the phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options â Undelete .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 91 Outbox Example: Messages are placed to Outbox, for example, when your phone is outside the network coverage area. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages that ar e waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox ⢠Sending - A connection is being made and the message is being sent. ⢠Waiting / Queued - Fo r example, if there are two sim ilar types of messages in Outbox, one of them is waiting until the first one is sent. ⢠Resend at (time) - Sending has failed. The phone will try to send the message again after a time-out period. Press Send if you want to re star t the sending immediately. ⢠Deferred - Yo u can set documen ts to be âÂÂon hold â while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sent and select Options â Defe r sending . ⢠Failed - The maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has failed. I f you w ere try ing to s end a text message, open the message and check that the Sending settings are correct. Viewing messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder i n your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options â SIM messages . 2 Select Options â Mark/Unmarkâ Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options â Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and press OK . Go to the folder to view the messages. Cell broadcast (network service) In the Messaging main view, select Options â Cell broadcast . You can receive messages on va rious topics, such as weathe r or traffic conditions from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the main view you can see:
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 92 Options in Cell broadcast: Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Unhotmark , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠the status of the topic: - for new, subscribed messages and - for new, unsubscribed messages. ⢠the topic number, topic name, and whethe r it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. You will be notified when messa ges be longing to a flagged top ic have ar rived. Note: A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Contact your network operator for the correct GPRS settings. For further information on the GPRS settings, see â Packet data (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS) â , p. 32 . Service command editor In the Messagin g main vie w, select Options â Service commands . You can send service requests, such as acti va tion commands for network services (also known as USSD commands), to your service pr ovider. For more inform ation, contac t your service provider. To send a request: ⢠in standby mode or when you have an acti ve call, k ey in the command number(s) and press Send , or ⢠if you need to en ter letters as well as numbers, select Messaging â Opt ions â Service command s. Messaging settings The Messaging settings have b een divided into groups acc ording to the different message types. Scroll to the settings yo u want to edi t and pres s .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 93 Settings for text messages Options when editing text message centre settings: New msg. centre , Edit , Delet e , Help , and Exit . Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Text message to open the following list of settings: ⢠Message ce ntres - Lists all the text message servic e centres that have been defined. See â Adding a new text message centre â , p. 93 . ⢠Msg. centre in use (Message centre in use)- De fines which message centre is used for delivering text messages and smart me ssages such as pi cture me ssages. ⢠Receive report (delivery repo rt)- When this network service is set to Yes , the status of the sent message ( Pending , Failed, Delivered ) is shown in the Log. See p. 21 . ⢠Message vali dity - If the recipient of a message ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the t ext message servic e centre. Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amou nt of time allowed by the network. ⢠Message sent as - The options are Text , Fax , Paging , and E-mail . For further in formation, contact your network operator. Note: Change this option only if you are sure that your service centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. ⢠Preferred conne ction - You can send text messages vi a the normal GSM network or via GPRS, if supported by the network. See â Packet data (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS) â , p. 32 . ⢠Reply via same ctr. (network service) - By setting this option to Yes , if the recipient replies to your message, the r eturn message is sent using the same text message service centre number. Note that this may not work between all operators. Adding a new text message centre 1 Open Message centres and select Options â New msg. centre. 2 Press , write a name for the service cen tre and press OK .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 94 3 Press , press and write the number of the text message service centre ( Must be defined ). Press OK . You need the message centre nu mber to send text and picture messages. You receive the number from your service provider. ⢠To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , press and select the new service centre. Settings for multimedia messages Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multimedia message to open the following list of settings: ⢠Preferred connection ( Must be defined ) - Select which access point is used as the preferred connection for th e multimedia message centre. See â Settings needed for multimedia messaging â , p. 77 . Note: If you receive multimedia message se ttings in a sm art message and sa ve them, the received settings are auto matically used for the Preferred connection. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . ⢠Secondary conn. - Select which access point is used as the secondary connection f or the multimedia message centre. Note: Both Preferr ed connection and Secondary conn. must have the same Homepage setting pointing to the same multimedia service centre. Only the data connection is different. Example: If your preferred connection uses a pack et data connection, you may want to use high speed data or data ca ll for the secondary c onnection. This way you are able to send and receive multimedia messages even when you are not in a network that supports packet data. For availability of and subscription to data services, please contact your ne twork operator or service provider. See also â General information about data connections and access points â , p. 31 . ⢠Multimedia reception - Select:
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 95 Only in home net. - if you want to receive multimed ia messag es onl y when you are in your home network. When you are outside your home network, multimedia message reception is turned off. Always on - if you want to receiv e multimedia messages always. Off - if you do not want to receive multim edia messages or adve rtis ements at all. Important: ⢠When you ar e outside your ho me network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. â¢I f t h e s e t t i n g s Only in home net. or Always on have been selected, your phone can make an active data call or GPRS connect ion withou t your knowledge. ⢠On receiving msg. - Select: Retr. immediately - if you want the phone to retrie ve multimedia messages instantly. If there are messages with Deferred st atus, they will be retrieved as well. Defer retrieval - if you want the multimedia messag ing centre to save the message to be retrieved later. To retrieve the message later, set On receivin g msg. to Retr. immediately . Reject message - if you want to reject mult imedia messages. The multimedia messaging centre will delete the messages. ⢠Allow anon. messag es - Select No , if you w ant to reject messages coming from an anonymous sender. ⢠Receive adverts - Define whether you w ant to receive multimedi a message advertisements or not. ⢠Receive report - Set to Yes , if you want the status of the sent message ( Pending , Failed , Delivered ) to be shown in the Log. See p. 21 . Note: Receiving a delivery report o f a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 96 ⢠Deny report sending - Choose Yes , if you do not want your phone to send delivery reports of received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity - If the recipient of a message ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is remove d from the multimedia messagin g centre. Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. ⢠Image size - Define th e size of the ima ge in a multimedia message. The options are: Small (max. of 160*120 pixels) and Large (max. 640*480 pixels). ⢠Default Speaker - Choose Louds peaker or Handset , if you want the sounds in a multimedia message to be pl ayed throug h the loudsp eaker or the earpiece. For more information , see â Loudspeaker â , p. 15 . Settings for e-mail Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â E-mail . Open Mailbox in use to select which mailbox you want to use. Settings for Mailboxes Select Mailboxes to open a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you will be p rompted to do so. The follo wing list of settings is shown: ⢠Mailbox name - Write a descriptive name for the mailbox. ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - The Internet A ccess Point (IAP) used for the mailbox. Choose an IAP from the list. For mo re in for ma tio n o n ho w t o c rea te an IAP , see also â Connection â , p. 31 . Options when editing e- mail settings: Edit , New mailbox , Delete , Help , and Exit . ⢠My mail address ( Must be defined ) - Write the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. The address must contain the @ character. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. ⢠Outgoing mail server: ( Must be defined ) - Write the IP address or host name of the computer that sends your e-mail.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 97 ⢠Send message - Defin e how e-mail is sen t from your phone. Immediate ly - A connection to the mailbox is started immediately after you have selected Send . During nex t conn. - E-mail is sent w hen you connect to your remote mailbox the next time. ⢠Send copy to self - Sele ct Yes to s av e a c op y of th e e- ma i l t o yo ur r em o te ma i lb o x a n d to the address defined in My mail address . ⢠Include signature - Select Yes if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages and to start to write or edit a signatur e text. ⢠User name: - Write your user name, given to you by your service provider. ⢠Password: - Write your password. If you leave th is field blank, you will be prompted for the password when you try to connect to y our remote mailbox. ⢠Incoming mail server: ( Must be defined ) - The IP address or host name of the computer that receives your e-mail. ⢠Mailbox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . Note: This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. ⢠Security - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SM TP protocols to secure the connectio n to the remote mailbox. ⢠APOP secure login - Used with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server. Not shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type: . ⢠Retrieve attachment (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - To retrieve e- mail with or without attachments. ⢠Retrieve headers - To limit the number of e-mail he aders you want to retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User defined . Used with the IMAP4 protocol only. Settings for service messages When you go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Service message , the following list of settings opens: ⢠Service messages - Choose whether or not you want to receive service messages.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 98 ⢠Authentic. n eeded - Choose if you want to receive service messages only from authorised source s. Settings for Cell broadcast Check with your service provider whether Cell broadcast is av ailable and what the available topics and related topic numbers are. Go t o Messaging â Options â Settings â Cell broadcast to change the settings: ⢠Reception - On or Off. ⢠Language - All allows you to receive cell broadc ast messages in every possible language. Select ed allows you to choose in which la nguages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If the la nguage you want could not be found in the list, select Other . ⢠Topic detection - If you receive a message that does not belong to any of the existing topics, Topic detection â On allows you to save the topic numb er automatically. The topic number is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. Choose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Settings for the Other folder Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Other to open the following list of settings: ⢠Save sent messages - Choose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder. ⢠No. of saved msgs. - Define how many sent messages will be saved to the Sent items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 mess ages. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use - Define memory store. Choices are phoneâÂÂs memory or memory car d , if one is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Profiles 99 9. Profiles Go to Menu â Profiles . In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five pr eset profiles: Gener al , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pager , which you can customise to meet your needs. Shortcut: To change the profile, press in standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate and press OK . You can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in standby mode. If the General profile is in use, only the current date is shown. The tones can be def ault ringing tones, tone s created in Composer, tones received in a message, or transferred to your phone via in frared, Bluetooth, or a PC connection and then saved to your phone. Changing the profile 1 Go to Menu â Profi les . A list of profiles opens. See Fig. 1 , p. 99 . 2 In the Profiles list, scroll to a profile and select Options â Activate. Customising profiles 1 To modify a profile, scroll to the pr ofile in the Profiles list and select Options â Personalise . A list of profile settings opens. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change and press to open the choices: ⢠Ringing tone - To set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. When you scroll through the list, you can stop on a tone to listen to it before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. If a memory card is used, tones stored on it have the icon next to tone name. Ringing tones use shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Fig. 1 The list of Profiles.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Profiles 100 Note: You can ch ange ringing tones in two places: Profiles or Contacts. See â Adding a ringi ng tone for a c ontact card or grou p â , p. 50 . ⢠Incoming call alert - When Ascending is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by le vel to the set volume level. ⢠Ringing volume - To set the volume level for th e ringing and message alert tones. ⢠Message alert tone - To set the tone for messages. ⢠Vibrating alert - To set the phone to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messages. ⢠Keypad tones - To set the volume level for keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones - T he phone sounds a warning tone, for example, wh en the battery is running out of power. ⢠Alert for - To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from people outside the selected group will have a silent alert. The choices are All calls / (list of contact groups, if you have created them). See â Creating contact groups â , p. 51 . ⢠Profile name - You can rename a profile and give it any name you want. The General profile cannot be renamed. Fig. 2 Profile settings
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Favourites 101 10. Favourites Go to Menu â Favourites . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. You can use Favourites to store shortcuts, lin ks to your favourite photos, video clips, notes, Recorder sound files, browse r bookmarks, and saved browser pages. The default shortcuts: - opens the Notes editor, - opens th e Calendar with the current date selected, - opens the Messaging Inbox. See Fig. 1 , p. 101 . Adding shortcuts Shortcuts can be added only from t he individu al applicati ons. Not all applicat ions have this functionality. 1 Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to add as a sh ortcut to Favourites. 2 Select Options â Add to Favourites and press OK . Note: A shortcut in Favourites is automatically updated if you move the item it is pointing to, for example, from one folder to another. Options in the Favourites main view: Open , Edit shortcut n ame , Shortcut icon , Delete shortcut , Move , List view / Gr id view , Help , and Exit . In Favourite s: ⢠To open a shortcut , scroll to the icon and press . The file is opened in the corresponding applicati on. ⢠To delete a shortcut , scroll to the shortcut you want to remove and select Options â Delete shortcut . Removing a shortcut does not affect the file it is referring to. ⢠To change the shortc ut heading , select Options â Edit shortcut name . Write the new name. This change affects only the shortcut, no t the file or item the shortcut refers to. Fig. 1 The Favourites main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Calendar and To-do 102 11. Calendar and To-do Go to Menu â Calendar Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Options when editing a calendar entry: Delete , Send , Help , and Exit . In Calendar, you can keep trac k of your appointments, meetin gs, birthdays, anniversaries, and other events. You can also set a calendar alarm to remind you of upcoming events. Calendar uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Creating calendar entries 1 Select Options â New entry and select: ⢠Meeting to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to write a general entry f o r a day. ⢠Anniversary to remind you of birthdays or sp ecial dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields, see the â Calendar entry fi elds â section, p. 103 . See Fig. 1 , p. 102 . Use the scroll key to move between fields. Pr ess to change between upper and lower case. 3 To save the entry, press Done . Editing calendar entries 1 In the Day view, scroll to the entry and press to open it. 2 Edit the entry fields and press Done . Fig. 1 Editing a calendar entry.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Calendar and To-do 103 ⢠If you are editing a repeated e ntry, choose how you want the changes to take effect: All occurrences - all repeated entries are changed / This entry only - only the current entry will be changed. Deleting calendar entries Example: Your weekly class has been cancelled. You have set the calendar to remind you every week. Choose This entry only and the calendar will remind you again next week. ⢠In the Day view, scroll to the entr y you want to delete and s elect Optio ns â Delete or press . Press Yes to confirm. ⢠If you are deleting a repeated e n try, choose how you want the change to take effect: All occurrences - all repeated entries are deleted / This entry only - only the current entry will be deleted. Calendar entry fields ⢠Subject / Occasion - Write a description of the event. ⢠Location - the plac e of a meeting, optional. ⢠Start time , End time, Start date , and End date. ⢠Alarm - Press to activate the fields for Alarm time an d Alarm date. ⢠Repeat - Press to change the entry to repeat. Shown with in the Day view. Example: The repeat function is handy if you have a recurring event, a weekly class, a biweekly meeting, or a da ily routine you need to r emember. ⢠Repeat until - You can set an ending date for the repeated entry, for example, the ending date of a weekly course you are taki ng . This option is shown only if you have selected to repeat the eve nt. ⢠Synchronisation - If you select Private , after synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar. This is useful when, for exampl e, you synchronise your calendar with a calendar on a compatible computer at work. If you select Public , the calendar entry is shown to others who have acc ess to view your calendar online. If you select None , the calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise your calendar.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Calendar and To-do 104 Calendar views Tip! If you press in Month, Week, or Day views, todayâÂÂs date is automatically highlighted. Month view In the Month view, one row equals one week. To dayâÂÂs date is underlin ed. Dates that have calendar entries are marked wi th a small triangle at the right bottom corner. T here is a frame around the currently sele cted date. See Fig. 2 , p. 104 . ⢠To open the Day view, scroll to the date you want to open and press . ⢠To go to a cert ain date, select Options â Go to date . Write the date and press OK . Calen dar ent ry icon s in Day and Week views: - Meetin g , - Memo , and - Anniversary . Fig. 2 Month, Week, and Day vie w s in Calendar. Synchronisation icons in Month view: - Private , - Public , - None , and - the day has more than one entry. Week view In the Week view, th e calendar entries for the selected week are shown in seven day boxes. TodayâÂÂs day of the week is underlined. Memos and Annivers aries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Meeting entries are marked with coloured bars according to starting and ending times. See Fig. 2 , p. 104 . ⢠To view or edit an entry, scroll to the ce ll that has an entry and p ress to open the Day view, then scroll to the entry and press to open it.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Calendar and To-do 105 Options in the different calendar vi ews: Open , New entry , Week view / Month view , De lete , Go to date , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Day view In the Day view, you can see the calendar en tries for the selected day. The entries are grouped according to their starting time. Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. See Fig. 2 , p. 104 . ⢠To open an entry for editing, scroll to it and press . ⢠Press to go to the next day or press to go to the previ ous day. Settings for calen dar views Select Options â Settings and select : Shortcut: To write a calendar entry, press any key ( - ) in an y calendar view. A Meet ing entry is opened and the characters you keyed in are added to the Subject field. ⢠Default view - To sele ct the view that is shown first when you open Calendar. ⢠Week starts on - To change the starting day o f the week. ⢠Week view title - To change the title of the Week view to be the week number or the week dates. Setting calendar alarms 1 Create a new Meeting or Anniver s ary entry, or open a previously created entry. 2 Scroll to Alarm and press to open the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. 3 Set the alarm time and date. 4 Press Done . An alarm indicator is shown ne xt to the entry in the Day view. Stopping a calendar alarm ⢠The alarm duration is one minute. When the alarm time expires, press Stop to end the calendar alarm. If you press any othe r key, the alarm is set to snooze. Sending calendar entries ⢠In the Day view, scroll to the entr y you want to sen d and select Options â Send . Then select the method, the choices are: Via text message , Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settin gs are in place), Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . For further
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Calendar and To-do 106 information, see the â Messagingâ chapter, â Sending and receiving data via infraredâ , p. 137 , and â Sending data via Bluetoothâ , p. 133 . To-do Go to Menu â To- do . In To-do you can keep a list of tasks that you need to do. See Fig. 3 , p. 106 . The To-do list uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . 1 To start to write a to-do note, press any key ( - ). The editor opens and the cursor blinks after the letters y ou have keyed in. 2 Write the task in the Subject field. Press to add special characters. ⢠To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field and key in a date. ⢠To set a priority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field and press . 3 To save the to-do note, press Done . Note: If you remove all char acters and press Done , the p reviously saved note will be deleted. ⢠To open a to-do note , scroll to it and press . ⢠To delete a to-do note , scroll to it and select Options â Delete or press . ⢠To mark a to-do no te as complete d , scroll to it and select Options â Mark as done . ⢠To restore a to-do note , select Option s â Mark as not done. Priority icons : - High , - Low , and (no icon) - Normal . Status icons : - task completed and - not completed. Fig. 3 Tasks in the To-do list.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Calendar and To-do 107 Importing data from other Nokia phones You can move calendar, contacts and to-do da ta from many different Nokia phones to your Nokia 3660 using the PC Suite for Nokia 3660 Data Import application. Instructions for using the application can be found in the PC Suite online help on the CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 108 12. Extras Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Extras folder. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is pro hibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Calculator Go to Menu â Extras â Calculator 1 Enter the first number of your calculation. Press to erase a mistake in the number. 2 Scroll to a function and press to select it. Options in Calculator: Last result , Memory , Cle ar screen , Help , and Exit . Use to add, to subtract, to multip ly, or to divide. 3 Enter the second number. 4 To execute the calculation, scroll to and press . Note: The Calculator has limited accura cy and rounding errors may occur, especially in long divisions. ⢠To add a decimal, press . ⢠Press and hold to clear the re sult of the prev ious calculation. Tip! Press repeatedly to scroll the functions. You can see the selection change between the functions. ⢠Use and to view previous calculations and move in the sheet. ⢠Select to save a number to the memory, indicated b y M . To retrieve the number from the memory, select . ⢠To retrieve the result of th e last calculation, select Options â Last result .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 109 Composer Go to Menu â Extras â Composer . Composer allows you to create your own, cust omised ringing tones. Note that it is not possible to edit a default ringing tone. 1 Select Options â New tone to open the editor and to start c omposing. Options in the Composer main view: Open , New tone , Delet e , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Duplicate , Help , and Exit . ⢠Use the keys to add notes and rests. See the table. Or, select Options â Insert symbol to open a list of notes and rests. The default duration for a note is 1/4. ⢠To listen to the tone, press or select Options â Play . To stop playing, press Stop . ⢠To adjust the volume select Options â Volume before you start to play the tone. ⢠To adjust the tempo, select Options â Tempo . To increase or decrease the tempo gradually, press or , respectively. Te mpo is measured in beats per minute. The maximum is 250 beats, the default tempo for a new tone is 160 beats, and the minimum is 50 beats. ⢠To select many notes or rests at the sa me time, press a nd hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠To apply different playing styles, select two or more notes and then select Options â Style â Legato - notes are played in a smoot h and even manner or select one or more notes and then select Staccato - notes are played separately to produce short sharp sounds. Options when composing: Play , Insert symbol , Style , Tempo , Volume , Help , and Exit . ⢠To move note(s) up or down on the staff by a half step, scroll to the note a nd press or . ⢠To produce C#, press and hold together with . 2 Press Back to save.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 110 Converter Go to Menu â Extras â Converter. In Converter, you can convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ). Note: The Converter has limited accura cy and rounding errors may occur. Options in Converter: Select unit / Change currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . Converting units 1 Scroll to the Type field and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use and press OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field and press to open a list of available units. Select the unit from which you want to convert and press OK . Scroll to the next Unit field and select the unit to which you want to convert. Key Note Key and function c Shortens the duration of the selected note(s)/rest(s) in steps. d Lengthens the duration of the selected note(s)/rest(s) in steps. e Inserts a rest. f Press to open a list of notes and rests. g Switches octaves, all selected no te(s) or rest (s) is/are moved to the next octave. a Deletes selected not e(s). b A long press of keys - produces a lengthened (dotted) note or rest or shortens a lengthened note.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 111 3 Scroll to th e first Amount field and key in the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and press for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Note: The conversion order changes if you write a value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the fir s t Amount field. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the Currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options â Rename currency . Setting a base currency and exchange rates Before you can make currency conversions , yo u need to choose a base currency (usually your domestic currency) and add exchange rates. Note: The rate of the base currency is alwa ys 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. Example: If you set the Euro (EUR) as the base currency, a United Kingdom Pound (GBP) is approximately 1.63575 EUR. Thus, you would write 1.63575 as the exchange rate for the GBP. 1 Select Currency as the measure type and select Options â Currency rates . A list of currencies opens and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To change the base currency, scroll to the currency (usually your domestic c urrency), and select Options â Set as base curr. Important: When you change the base currency, all previously set exchange rates are set to 0 and you need to key in new rates. 3 Add exchange rates, scroll to the currency, and key in a new rate, that is, how many units of the currency equal one unit of the base curr ency you have selected. See the example on the side of the page. 4 After you have inserted all the needed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions, see â Converting units â , p. 110 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 112 Notes Go to Menu â Extras â Notes. You can link notes to Favourites and send them to other devices. Plain text files (TXT format) you receive can be saved to Notes. ⢠Press ( - ) to start to wri te. Press to clear letters. Press Done to save. Clock Go to Menu â Extras â Clock . Changing clock settings ⢠To change the time or date, select Options â Settings in Clock. To change the clock shown in standby mode, scroll down in the Date and time settings and select Clock type â Analogue or Digital . Options in Clock: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Settings , Help , and Exit . Setting an alarm 1 To set a new alarm, selec t Options â Set alarm . 2 Enter the alarm time and press OK . When the alarm is active, the indicato r is shown. Note: The alar m clock works even if the phone is switched off. ⢠To cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Options â Remove alarm . Turning off the alarm â¢P r e s s Stop to turn off the alarm. ⢠When the alarm tone sounds, press any key or Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume. You can do this a maximum of five times.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 113 If the alarm time is reached while the phone is switched off, the phone switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the phone asks whether you want to activate the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phone or Yes to make and receive calls. Note: Do not pr ess Yes when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Recorder Go to Menu â Extras â Recorder . The voice recorder allows you to record tele phone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conver sation, both parti es will hear a tone ever y five seconds during recordin g. Options in Recorder: Open , Record sound clip , Delete , Move to phone mem , Move to mem. card , Mark/Unmark , Rename sound clip , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , Help , and Exit . Note: Obey all local laws governing record ing of calls. Do not use this feature illegally. ⢠Select Opt ions â Record sound clip and scroll to a function and press to sel ect it. Use: - to record, - to pause, - to stop, - to fast forward, - to fast rewind, or - to play an opened sound file. Note: Recorder cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active. Games Go to Menu â Games . To start a game, pr ess Menu â Games , scroll to the game ico n and press . For instructions on how to play the game, press Options â Help .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 114 Memory card Go to Menu â Extras â Memory card . If you have a memory card you can use it to store your multimedia files like video clips and sound files, photos, messaging information, and to backup information from your phoneâÂÂs memory. The memory card in the sales packa ge may co ntain promotional material of third parties which you can delete. Important: Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Note: Details of how you can use the memory card with other features and applications of your Nokia 3660 a re given in the sections describing th ese features and applications. Options in the memory card: Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Set password , Change password , Remove password , Unlock memory card , Memory details , Help and Exit . To insert the memory card Fig. 1 Positioning and securing the memory card. AB
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 115 1 Make sure the phone is switched off. If it âÂÂs on, press and hold to switch off the phone. 2 With the back of the phone facing you, slide o pen the cover and remove the battery, see Quick start guide âÂÂInsert the SIM card and load the batteryâ for instruction s on removing the cover. 3 Position the memory card in its slot as shown in Fig. 1 A, p. 114 . Make sure that the gold cont acts of the card are facing down. 4 Slide the silver catch over the memory card to secure it in its place, see Fig. 1 B, p. 114 . 5 When you have secured the card in pla c e, replace the battery, then replace the cover by sliding it back into place. Important: Do not remove the memory card in middle of an operation. Be sure to close all memor y card applicat ions before rem oving the ca rd. Important: If you are installing an applic atio n to the memory card and need to reboot the phone, do not remove the card until the reboot is complete. Otherwise the application files may be lost. Format memory card You must format the memory card befo re you can use it for the first time. ⢠Select Options â Format mem. card . You will be asked to confirm your request and once you confirm, formatting start s, see Fig. 2 , p. 115 . Backing up and restoring information You can backup information from yo ur phoneâÂÂs memory to the memory card. ⢠Select Options â Backup phone mem. You can restore information from th e memory card to the phoneâÂÂs memory. ⢠Select Options â Restore from card . Fig. 2 Format memory card.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 116 Memory card password You can set a password to lock your memory card against unauthorised use. Note: The password is stored in your phone and you donâÂÂt have to enter it again while you are using the memo ry card on the same phone. If you use the memory card on another phone, you w ill be asked for the password. To set, change, or remove yo ur password ⢠Select Options â Set password , Chang e password , or Remove password . For every option you will be asked to enter an d confirm your passwo rd. The password can be up to eight characters long. Important: Once the password is removed, the memory ca rd is unlocked and can be used on another phone without a password. Unlocking a memory card If you insert another password protected memory card in yo ur phone, you will be prompted to enter the password of the card. To unlock the card, ⢠Select Options â Unlock mem ory card . Checking memory consumption Using the Memory details option, you can check the memory consumption of different data groups and the available memory for inst alling new applications or software on yo ur memory card. ⢠Select Options â Memory details .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 117 13. Services (XHTML) Go to Menu â Services or press and hold in standby mode. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Glossary: X HTML browser supports pages written in the Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) and the Wireless Markup Language (WML). Various service providers on the Internet main tain pages specifically designed for mobile phones, offering services such as news, weather reports, ba nking, tra vel information, entertainment, and games. With the XHTML br owser you can view these services as WAP pages written in WML, XHTM L pages written in XHTML, or a mixture of both. Note: Check the availability of services, pric ing, and tariffs wi th your network operator and/or service provider. Service pr oviders wil l also give you instructions on how to use their services. Basic steps for accessing ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the web service that you want to use. See the next section â Setting up the phone for the browser service â . ⢠Make a connection to the service. See p. 118 . ⢠Start browsing the web pages. See p. 120 . ⢠End the connection to the service. See p. 123 . Fig. 1 The Bookmarks view with the Go to field at the bottom.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Services (XHTML) 118 Setting up the phone for the browser service Receiving settings in a smart message Tip! Settings may be available, for example, on the site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive service settings in a specia l text mess age, a so-call ed smart me ssage, from the network operator or service pr ovider that offer s the service. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Keying in the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. 1 Go to Settings â Connection settingsâ Access points and define the settings for an acces s point. See â Connection â , p. 31 . 2 Go to Services â Opt ions â Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the browser page defi ned for the current access point. Making a connection Tip! To access the Bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view again, select Options â Back to page . Once you have stored all the required connec tion settings, you can access browser pages. There are three different ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the homepage ( ) of your service provider, ⢠Select a bookmark from the Bookmarks v iew, or ⢠Press the keys - to start to write th e address of a browser serv ice. The Go to field at the bottom of the display is i mmediately activated and you can continue writing the address there. After you have selected a page or written th e address, press to start to download the page. See also â Data connection indicators â , p. 10 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 119 Connection security If the security indicator is displayed du ri ng a connection, the data transmission between the phone and the browser gatewa y or server is encrypted and secure. Note: The security icon does no t indicate that data transmiss ion between the gateway and the content server (place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. It is up to the service provider to secure data tran smissio n between the gateway and the content server. Viewing bookmarks Options in the Bookmarks view (selection on a bookmark or folder): Open , Downloa d , Back to page , Send , Go to URL address / Find bookmark , Add bookmark , Edit , Delete , Read service ms gs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Clear cache , Details , Add to Favouri tes , Settings , Help , and Exit . Glossary: A bookmark consi sts of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, WAP access point, and if the service requires, a user name and password. Note: Your phone may have some pre-insta lled bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endor se these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as yo u would with any site. In the Bookmarks view, you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of web pages. Bookmarks are indicated by the following icons: - The starting page defined for the br owser access point. If you use another web access point for browsing, the star ting page is changed accordingly. - The last visited page. When the phone is disconnected from the service, the address of the last visited page is kept in memory until a new page is visited during the next connection. - A bookmark showing the title. When you scroll through bookmarks, you ca n see the address of the highlighted bookmark in the Go to field at th e bottom of the display. See Fig. 1 , p. 117 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Services (XHTML) 120 Options when browsing: Open , Service options , Bookmarks , History , Go to URL address , View image , Read service msgs. , Save as bookmark , Send bookmark , Reload , Disconnect , Show images , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Session , Security , Settings , H elp , and Exit . Adding bookmarks manually 1 In the Bookmarks view, select Options â Add bookmark. 2 Start to fill in the fields, see Fig. 2 , p. 120 . Only the address must be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookma rk if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Select Options â Save to save the bookmark. Sending bookmarks ⢠To send a bookmark, scroll to it and select Options â Send â Via text message . Browsing On a browser page, new links appear unde rlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. See Fig. 3 , p. 121 . Keys and commands used in browsing ⢠To open a link, press . ⢠To scroll the view, use the scroll key. ⢠To enter letters and numbers in a fie ld, press the keys - . Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. ⢠To go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available, select Options â History to view a chronological list of the pages you hav e visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a se ssion is closed. ⢠To check boxes and make selections, p ress . ⢠To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options â Reload . ⢠To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open web page, s elect Options â Service opti ons . Fig. 2 Editing a bookmark.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 121 ⢠Press and hold to disc onnect from a web service and to quit browsing. Viewing new service messages while browsing To download and view new service messages while browsing: 1 Select Options â Read service msgs. (shown only if there are new messages). 2 Scroll to the message and press to download and open it. For more information abou t service messages, see â Service messages â , p. 84 . Saving bookmarks ⢠To save a bookmark while browsing, select Options â Save as bookmark . ⢠To save a bookmark received in a smart me ssage, open the message in the Inbox in Messaging and select Options â Save to bookmarks . See also â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . Viewing saved pages Options in the Saved pages view: Open , Ba ck to page , Reload , Remove , Read service ms gs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Clear cache , Details , Add to Favouri tes , Settings , Help , and Exit . If you regularly browse pages containing in formation which doesnâÂÂt change very often, for example a train timetable, you can save and then browse them when offline. ⢠To save a page, while browsing select Options â Save page . Saved pages are indicated by the following icon: - The saved web page. In the saved pages view you can also crea te folders to store your saved web pages. Folders are indicated by the following icon: - Folder containing saved web pages. Fig. 3 A web page.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Services (XHTML) 122 ⢠To open the Saved pages view, press in the Bookmarks view, see Fig. 4 , p. 122 . In the Saved pages view, press to open a saved page. If you want to start a connection to the web se rvice and to retrieve the page again, select Options â Reload . You can also arrange the pages into folders. Note: The phone stays online after you reload the page. Downloading You can download items such as ringing tone s, images, operator logos and video clips through the mobile browser. These item s can be provided free or for a price. Once downloaded, items are handled by the re spective applications on your phone, for example a downloaded photo will be saved in the Images . Note: The informa tion or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of t he phone. A cach e is a buff er me mo ry that is used to store data temporarily. If you have trie d to access or have access ed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your ba nk account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. To empty the cache, select Options â Clear cache . Downloading directly from the web page To download the item directly from a web page: ⢠Scroll to the link and select Option s â Open . Fig. 4 The Saved pages view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 123 Purchasing an item Glossary: Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a sy stem for protecting the copyright of digital content that is distributed online. Note: Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. To download the item: ⢠Scroll to the link and select Options â Open . ⢠Choose the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, Buy. Checking an item before downloading You can see details about an item before you download it. Details about an item may include the price, brief description and size. Note: Check with your service provide to see if they off er this service. ⢠Scroll to the link and select Options â Open . Details about the item are displa yed on your phone. See Fig. 5 on p. 123 . ⢠If you want to continue w ith the downloadi ng, press Accept or if you want to cancel the download, press Cancel . Ending a connection ⢠Select Options â Disconnect , or ⢠Press and hold to qui t browsing and to return to standby mode. Browser settings ⢠Default access point - I f y o u w a n t t o c h a n g e t h e d e f a ult access point, press to open a list of available access po ints. The current default access point is highlighted. For more information, see â Connection â , p. 31 . Fig. 5 Example of details in a content file.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Services (XHTML) 124 ⢠Show images - Choose if you want to view pict ures when you are browsing. If you choose No , you can later load images du ring browsing by selecting Options â Show images . ⢠Font size - You can choose five text sizes in the browser: Small est , Smal l , Normal , Large , and Largest . ⢠Default encoding - To make sure your browser pages display text cha racters correctly, select the appropriate language type. ⢠Cookies - Allow / Reject . You can enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. ⢠Conf. DTMF se nding - Always / First time only . The browser supports functions you can access while browsing. You can: make a vo ice call while you are on a browser page, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in p rogress, save in Contacts a name and phone number from a browser page. Choose whethe r you want to confirm before the ph one sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also âÂÂDTMF tonesâÂÂ, p. 20 . ⢠Text wrapping - Choose Off if you donâÂÂt want th e text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Applications (Javaâ¢) 125 14. Applications (Javaâ¢) Go to Menu â Applications Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Options in the Applications main view: Open , View details , Settings , Remove , Go to URL address , Update , Help , and Exit . In the Applications main view you can open installed Java appl icatio ns or r em ove th em . In the Install view you can install new Java applications ( file extensions .JAD or .JAR). Note: Your phone supports J2MEâ¢Java applications. Do not download PersonalJava⢠applications to your phone as they cannot be installed. When you open Applications, you can see a li st of Java applications that have been installed to your phone. See Fig. 1 on p. 125 . ⢠Scroll to an application and select Options â View details to view: ⢠Status - Installed , Running , or Downloaded (shown only in Install view), ⢠Version - the application vers ion number, ⢠Supplier - the supplier or manufacturer of the application, ⢠Size - the size of the applic ation file in kilobytes, ⢠Type - a brief description of the application, ⢠URL - an address of an informat ion page on the Internet, and ⢠Data - the size of application data su ch as high scores, in kilobytes. ⢠To start a data connection and to view extra information about the application, sc roll to it and select Options â Go to URL address . ⢠To start a da ta connection an d to check if there is an update available for the application, scroll to it and select Options â Update . Applications uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Fig. 1 Applications main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Applications (Javaâ¢) 126 Installing a Java application Options in the Install view: Install , View details , Delete , Help , and Exit . Installation files may be transferred to your phone from a computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia mess age, as an e-mail att achment, via Bluetooth, or via infrared. If you are using PC Suite for Nokia 3660 to transfer the file, place it in the c:\nokia \installs folder in your phone. Important: Only install software from sour ces that offer adequate protection against viruses and other har mful software. 1 In the Applications main v iew, to view the installation packages, press to open the Downloaded view. Note: In the Install view, you can only inst all Java software installation files with the extension .JAD or .JAR. 2 To install an application, s croll to an inst allation file and select Options â Install. Alternatively, search the phone memory for the ins tallation file, select the file, and press to start the insta llation. See the example on the side of the page. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e- mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e- mail, open the Attachments view, scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. 3 Press Yes to confirm the installation. The .JAR file is required fo r installation. If it is miss ing, the phone may ask y ou to download it. If there is no access point defi ned for Applications, you will be asked to select one. When you are downloading the JAR f ile, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server . You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the pa ckage to be installed. The phone shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options whether to continue with or canc el the installation. Once the phone has checked the integrity of the software packag e, the appli cation is installed on your phone. 4 The phone informs you when installation is complete. To open the Java application after in stallation, you must go to the Applications main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Applications (Javaâ¢) 127 Tip! When you are browsing WAP or b r owser pages, you can download an installation file and install it immediat ely. Note, however, that the connection is left running in the backgr ound during installation . Opening a Java application ⢠Scroll to an application in the Applicat ions main view and press to open it. Uninstalling a Java application ⢠Select the application in the Applications main view and select Options â Remove . Java application settings To define a default access point for download ing missing applicati on components, select Options â Settings â Default access point . For more information on creating access points, see the â Access po ints â , p 34 . Select an application and select Options â Settings , and then select one of: ⢠Access point - Select an access point to be us ed by the application for download ing extra data. ⢠Network connection - Some Java applications may require a data connection to be made to a defined access point. If no access poi nt has been selected, yo u will be asked to select one. The options are: Allowed - The connection is created immediately without a notification. Ask first - You will be asked before the application makes the connection. Not allowed - Connections are not allowed.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Manager - installing appl ications and software 128 15. Manager - installing applications and software Go to Menu â Tools â Manager Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Tool s fold er. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is pro hibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Options in the Manager main view: View deta ils , View certificate , Install , Remove , View log , Send log , Memory details , Help , and Exit . In Manager you can install new applicati ons and softwa re packages, a nd remove applications from your phone. You ca n also check the memory consumption. When you open Manager, you can see a list of: ⢠installation packages that ha ve been saved to Manager, ⢠partially installed applications (indi cated by ), and ⢠fully installed applications that you can remove (indicated by ). Note: In Manager, you can only use device software installation files with an extension .SIS. Tip! To install Java⢠applications (file extension .JAD or .JAR), go to Applications. For further inf ormation, se e â Applications (Javaâ¢) â , p. 125 . ⢠Scroll to an installation file and select Options â View details to view the Name , Version , Type , Size , Supplier , and Status of the software package. ⢠Scroll to a software package and select Options â View certificate to display the security certificate details of a software package. See â Certif. managementâ , p. 41 . Important: Only install software from sour ces that offer adequate protection against viruses and other har mful software. To help you, the software installation system uses digital signatures and certificates on software packages. Do not in stall the application if Manager gives a security warning during installation.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Manager - installing appl ications and software 129 Installing software You can install applications that are specific ally intended for the Nokia 3660 or suitable for the Symbian operating system. A software package is us ually one large compres sed file containing many component files. Tip! Sele ct Options â View lo g to see what software packages have been installed or removed and when. Note: If you install a program that is not in te nded specifically for the Nokia 3660, it may function and look very differen t from the usual Nokia 3660 applications. Important: If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only re store the original applicatio n if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, first remov e the application and then install the application again from the original in stallation file or the back-up copy. 1 Installation packages may be transferred to your phone from a computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a mult imedia message, as an e-mail attachment, via Bluetooth, or via infrared. If you are us ing PC Suite for Nokia 3660 to transfer the file, place it in the c:\nokia\installs folder on your phone. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e- mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e- mail, open the Attachments view, sc roll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. 2 Open Manager, scroll to the installation package, and select Options â Install to start the installation. Alternatively, search the phone memory or the memory card for the installation file, select the file, and press to start the in stallation. See the example on the side of the page. If you are installing softwar e without a digita l signature or a certificate, the phone warns you of the risks of installing so ftware. Continue installation on ly if you are absolutely sure of the origin and contents of the software package. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the pa ckage to be installed. The phone shows information about the checks be ing c arried out and you are given options whether to continue or cancel the installati on. Once the phone has checked the integrity of the software package, the applic ation is installed on your phone.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Manager - installing appl ications and software 130 Tip! To send your installation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, select Options â Send log â Via text message or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Removing software 1 To remove a softwa re package, scrol l to it and select Options â Remove. 2 Press Yes to confirm the removal. Important: If you remove software, you can only re-insta ll it if you have the original softwar e package or a full back -up of the remo ved so ftware package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If another so ftware package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Viewing memory consumption ⢠To open the me mory view select Optio ns â Memory details . Note: If you have a memory card installe d on your phone, you will have a choice of two memory views, one for the phone or Phone me mory and one for the Memory card . If not, you will only have the Phone memory view. When you open either of the memory views, the phone calculates the amount of free memory for storing data and in stalling new software. In the memory v iews, you can view the memory consumption of the different data groups: Calendar , Contacts, Documents, Messages , Images , Sound files , Video clips , Applicati ons , Mem. in use , and Free memory . Tip! If the phone memory is getting low, remove some documents, or move them to the memory card. See also the â Troubleshooting â chapter, p 141 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 131 16. Connectivity Go to Menu â Connectivity â Bluetooth Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Connectivity folder. Do not switch the phone on when wi reless phone use is prohibit ed or when it may cause interference or d anger. You can transfer data from your phone to another compatible device, for example, a phone or a computer, via Bluetooth or infrared. Bluetooth connection Note: The Nokia 3 660 phone is designed to be compliant with and to adopt Bluetooth Specification 1.1. However, intero perability between the phone and other products with Bluetooth wireless te chnology depends also on the profiles and protocols used. For more information on the compatibility between Bluetooth devices, please consult your dealer. Bluetooth enables cost-free wireless connect ions between electronic devices within a maximum range of 10 metres. A Bluetooth co nnection can be used to send images, videos, texts, business cards, calendar note s, or to connect wirelessly to Bluetooth- enabled devices such a s computers. Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. See Fig. 1 , p. 131 . The two devices only need to be within a maxi mum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. Fig. 1 Using Bluetooth.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 132 Using Bluetooth consumes the battery and th e phone's operating time will be reduced. Take this into account when performing other operations wit h your phone. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your local authorities. Activating Bluetooth application for the first time When you activate the Bluetooth application for the first time, you are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phone. Note: Afte r you have set Bluetooth to be active and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , your phone and t his name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. ⢠Write a name (max. 30 letters). If you send data via Bluetooth before you have given an individual Bluetooth name to your phone, the default name will be used. Bluetooth settings To modify Bluetooth settings, scroll to the setting you want to change and press . ⢠Bluetooth - Select On if you want to use Bluetooth. If you set Bluetooth Off all active Bluetooth connections are ended and Blue tooth cannot be used for sending or receiving data. ⢠My phone's visibility - If you select Shown to all your phone can be fo und by other Bluetooth devices during device search. If you select Hidden your phone cannot be found by other devices during device search. ⢠My Bluetooth name - Define a Bluetooth name for your phone. After you have set Bluetooth to be active and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , this name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Fig. 2 Bluetooth settings
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 133 Tip! To send text via Bluetooth (instead of text messages), go to Notes , write the text, and select Options â Sendâ via Bluetooth . Tip! When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Bluetooth addresses (device addres ses). To find out the unique Bluetooth address of your phone, enter the code *#2820# in standby mode. Sending data via Bluetooth Note: There can be only one active Bluetooth conne ction at a time. 1 Open an application where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send a photo to another device, open the Images application. 2 Scroll to the item you want to se nd , for exampl e, a photo and s elect Options â Send â Via Bluetooth . 3 The phone starts to search for devices with in range. Bluetooth enabled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. S ee Fig. 3 , p. 133 . You can see a device icon, the deviceâÂÂs Bluetooth name, the device type, or a short name. Paired devices are shown with . Note: If you have searched for Bluetooth de vices earlier, a list of the devic es that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list of devices is cleared and the device search needs to be started again before sending data. ⢠To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a connection to one of the devices already found . Fig. 3 Sending an image via Bluetooth, the phone starts to search for devices.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 134 Glossary: Pairing means authentication. The users of the Bluetooth-enabled devices should agree together what the passcode is, and use the same passc ode for both devices in order to p air them. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. 4 Scroll to the device you want to connect with and press Select . The item you are sending is copied to Outbox and the note Connecting is shown. 5 Pairing (if not require d by the other device, go to step 6 ) ⢠If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds and you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1-16 characters long, nu meric) and agree with the owner of the other Bluetooth device to us e the same code. This passcode is used only once and you do not have to memorise it. ⢠After pairing, the device is sa ved to the Paired devices view. 6 When the connection has been successfully established, the note Sending data is shown. Note: Data received via Bluetooth can be found in the Inbox folder in Messaging. See p. 81 for furthe r informat ion. Icons for different Bluetooth devices: - Computer , - Phone , - Other , and - Unknown . Note: If sending fails, the message or data w ill be deleted. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent via Bluetooth. Checking the statu s of the Bluetooth connection ⢠When is shown in standby mode, Bluetooth is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is trying to connect to the other device. ⢠When is shown continuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Paired devices view Pairing with a device makes device search es ea sier and quicker. Paired devices are easier to recognise, they are indicated by in th e search result list. In the Bluetooth main view, press to open a list of paired devices ( ).
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 135 Options in the paired devices vi ew: New paired device , Connect / Discon nect , Assign short name , Delete , Delete all , Set as authorised / Set as unauthorised , Help , and Exit . Pairing with a device 1 Select Options â New paired device in the Paired devices view. Th e phone starts to search for devices within range. Or, if you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier, a list of the devices that were found previous ly is shown first. To start a new sea rch, select More de vices . 2 Scroll to the device you want to pair with and press Select . 3 Exchange passcodes, see step 5 (Pairing) in the previ ous se ction. The device is added to the Paired devices list. Cancelling pairing Tip! You can also play phone-to-phone games via Bluetooth. ⢠In the Paired devices view, scroll to the de vice whose pairing you want to cancel and press or select Options â Delete . The device is removed from the Paired devices list and the pairing is cancelled. ⢠If you want to cancel all pairings, s elect Options â Delete all . Note: If you are currently connected to a dev i ce, and d elete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately but the connection will remain active. Assigning short names for paired devices Example: Give a short name to you r friendâÂÂs Bluetooth-enabled device or to your own computer to be able to recognise it more easily. You can define a short name (nickna me, alias), to help you recognise a certain device. This name is stored in the phone memory and cann ot be seen by other Bluetooth device users. ⢠To assign a short name, scroll to the device and select Options â Assign short name . Write the short name and press OK . Note: Choose a name which is easy to reme mb er and recognise. Later when you are searching for devices or a device is requesting a connection, the name you have chosen will be used t o identify t he device.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 136 Setting a device to be auth orised or unauthorised After you have paired with a device, you ca n set it to be authorised or unauthorised: Unauthorised (default) - Connection requests from this device need to be accepted separately every time. Authorised - Connections between your phone and th is device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptan ce or authorisation is needed . Use this status for your own devices, for example, your PC, or devices t hat belong to someone you trust. The icon is added next to authorised devices in the Paired devices view. See Fig. 4 , p. 136 . ⢠In the Paired devices view, scroll to the device and select Option s â Set as authorised / Set as unauthorised . Receiving data via Bluetooth When you receive data via Bluetooth, a tone sounds and you are asked if you want to accept the Bluetooth message. If you accept, is shown and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Bluetooth messages are indicated by . See p. 81 for further information . Disconnecting Bluetooth A Bluetooth connection is di sconnected automatically after sending or receiving data. Infrared connection To start infrared, go to Menu â Connectivity â Infrared Via infrared, yo u can send or rece ive data su ch as business cards and calendar notes to and from a compatible phone or data device. Do not point the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product. Fig. 4 Two devices are set to be au thorised.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 137 Sending and receiving data via infrared Note: All items which are received via infrared are placed in the Inbox f older in Messaging. New infrared messages are indicated by . See p. 81 for further information. Tip! You can also play phone-to-phone games via i nfrared. 1 Make sure that the infrared ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there ar e no obstructions between th e devices. The preferable distance between the two devices is one metr e at most. To find the infrared port, see the Keys and parts picture in the Quick star t guide. Example: T o s e n d a contact card via infrared: (1) Ask the receiver to activate th e infrared port in his/her device. (2) Go to Contacts, scroll to a card and select Options â Send business card â via infrared . 2 The user of the receiving device activates the infrared port. To activate the infrared port of your phone to receive data via infrared, go to Menu â Connectivity â Infrared and press . 3 The user of the sending device selects the desired infrared function to start data transfer. To send data via infrared, select Options â Send â via infrar ed in an application. If data transfer is not started within one minute after the activation of the infrared port , the connection is cancelled and must be started again. Note: Windows 2000: To be able to use infrared to transfer files between your Nokia 3660 and a compatible computer, go to âÂÂControl Panelâ a n d select âÂÂWireless LinkâÂÂ. In the âÂÂWireless Linkâ âÂÂFile Transf er â tab check the âÂÂAllow othersâ to send files to your computer using infrared. Checking the status of th e infrared connection ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to co nnect to the other device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown continuously, the infrar ed connection is active and your phone is ready to send and receive data via its infrared port.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 138 Connecting your phone to a computer For further in formation on how to make a connection to a compatible computer via infrared or Bluetooth, and how to install the PC Suite for Nokia 3660, see the Installation Guide for PC Sui te on the CD -ROM in the âÂÂInstallâ se ction. For further information on how to use the PC Suite for Nokia 366 0, see the PC suite online help . Using the CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch itself after you ha ve inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of your compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Window Start button and select Programs â Windows Explorer. 2 On the CD-ROM drive, locate a file called Nokia3660.exe and double-click it. The CD- ROM interface opens. 3 You can find PC Suite for Nokia 3660 in th e âÂÂInstallâ section. Double-click âÂÂPC Suite for Nokia 36 60 â . The installation wizard will gu ide you through the installation process. Using your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet or to send or receive faxes Detailed installati on instructions can be found in Quick guide for Mo dem Options for Nokia 3660 on the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Sync - remote synchronisation Go to Menu â Connectivity â Sync Note: You have to download the Sync app lication from the Nokia web site www.nokia.com/phones/3660/support.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 139 The Sync application enables you to synchronis e your calendar or contacts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. Synchronisation takes place ov er a GSM data call or packet data connectio n. The synchronisation applicat ion uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, please contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone d ata with. Glossary: Synchronisation profile is the settings for the remote server. You can create several profiles if you need to synchronise your data with multiple servers or applications. Creating a new synchronisation profile 1 If no profiles have been de fined, the phone asks you if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Options â New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default setting values or cop y the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name - Write a descriptive name for the profile. Options in Remote sync main view: Synchronise , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Delete , View lo g , Help , and Exit . Bearer type / Host address / Port / HTTP authentication - Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Access point - S e l e c t a n a c c e s s p o i n t y o u w a n t t o use for the data connection. For more information, see â Connection â , p. 31 . User name - Your user ID for the synchronisatio n server. Contact your service provider or system administ rato r for your correct ID. Password - Write your password. Contact yo ur service provider or system administrator for the correct value. Calendar - Select Yes if you want to synchronise your calendar. Remote calendar - Enter a correct path to the remote calendar on the server. Must be defined if the previous setting Calendar has been set to Yes . Contacts - Select Yes if you want to synchronise your contacts.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 140 Remote contacts - Enter a correct path to the remo te address book on the server. It must be defined if the previous setting Contacts has been set to Yes . 3 Press Done to save the settings. Synchronising data In the Sync main view, you can see the different profiles. See Fig. 5 , p. 140 . You can also see which protocol the profile uses: http or WAP and what kind of data will be synchronised: Calendar, Contacts, or both. 1 In the main view, scroll to a profile and select Options â Synchronise . The st atus of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchron isation before it is finished, press Cancel . 2 You are notified when the synchronisation has been co mpleted. ⢠After synchronisation is complete, press View log or select Options â View log to open a log file showing t he synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronised) in the ph one or on the server. Fig. 5 The Remote synchronisation main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Troubleshooting 141 17. Troubleshooting Memory lo w When the following notes are shown, the phone memory is low and you must start to delete some data: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, go to Manager and select Option s â Memory details . You may want to delete the following items regularly t o avoid memory ge tting low: ⢠messages from the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent folders in Messaging, ⢠retrieved e-mail message s from the phone memory, ⢠saved browser pages, and ⢠images and photos in Images. If you want to delete contact in formation, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game sc ores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and another of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data firs t. or Memory low. Delete some data., try deleting items one by on e (starting from the smallest item). Clearing calendar memory - To remove more than one event at a time, go to the Month view and select Options â Delete entry â and either ⢠Before date - to de lete all calendar not es which take place before a certain date. Enter the date before which all calendar notes will be deleted , or ⢠All entries - to delete all calendar notes. Erasing log informatio n - To erase all the log contents, Recent calls register, and Mes saging delivery reports permanently, go to Logs and select Options â Clear log or go to Settings â Log duration â No log. Different ways to store data : ⢠us e PC Suite for Nokia 3660 to take a backup copy of all data to your computer, see p. 138 , ⢠send images to your e-mail address and then save the images to your computer, or ⢠send data via infrared or Bluetooth to another device.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Troubleshooting 142 Q&A Phone display ⢠Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my phone? A: This is an intrinsic charac teristic of the active matrix display. Your phoneâÂÂs display contains multiple switching elements to control the pixels. A small number of missing, discoloured, or bright dots on the screen might exist. Camera ⢠Q: Why doe s the image appear dark when I am taking a picture with the Camera or viewing image s? A: The display contrast setting affects the appearance of images. Check the display contrast setting and adjust it to lighter. Go to Settings â Phone settings â Display â Contrast . ⢠Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Check that the camera lens protection window is clean. To clean the window follow the instructions in â Care and mainte nance â , p. 146 . Bluetooth ⢠Q: Why ca nâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is pair ing with your phone but not sending data, and leaves the device connection open, then the only way to disconne ct it is to deac tivate the Bluetooth link altoget her. Go to Bluetooth and select the setting Bluetooth â Off. ⢠Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs Blueto oth-enabled device. A: Check that both have activated Bluetooth. Check that the di stance betw een t he two devi ces is not over 10 metres or that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in âÂÂHiddenâ mode. Multimedia messaging ⢠Q: What should I do when the phone tells me that it cannot receive a multimedia message because memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Delete some data first. To view wha t kind of data you hav e and how much memory the different data groups consume, go to Manager and select Options â Memory details . After you have freed up me mory , the multimedia message centre tries to send the multimedia messages again automatically. ⢠Q: What should I do when the phone gives the message: Unable to retrieve multimed ia message. Network connection already in use. ? A: End all active data connec tions. Multimedia messages cannot be received if another data connection using a different gateway address is active for browse r or e-mail. ⢠Q: How can I end t he data connection when the phone starts a data connection again and again? Th e notes: Retrieving message or Trying to retrieve message again are shown briefly. What is happening?
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Troubleshooting 143 A: The phone is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging centre. Check that the settings for multimedia messaging have been defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Go t o Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multime dia message . To stop the phone from making a data connection, you have the following options. Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multime dia message , and then: ⢠Select On receiving msg. â Defer retrieval if you want the multimedia messaging centre to save the message to be retrieved later, for example , after you have checked the settings. A fter this chan ge, the phone still needs to send information notes to the network. To retrieve the message later, select Retr. imme diately . ⢠Select On receiving msg. â Reject message - if you want to reject all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the phone needs to send info rmation notes to the network and the multimedia messaging centre will delete all multimedia message s that are waiting to be sent to you. ⢠Select Multimedia reception â Off - if you want to ignore all incoming multim edia messa ges. After t his change the phone will not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. Images ⢠Q: Is the format of the image IâÂÂm try ing to open supported? A: See p. 59 for further information on the support ed image formats. Messaging ⢠Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: If you cannot select a contac t in the Contacts directory, the contact card does not have a phone number or an e- mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in the Contacts application. Calendar ⢠Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have cha nged the Ca lendar settings s o that the week starts on a day other than Monday, then the week numbers will not be shown. Browser Services â¢Q : No valid access point defined. Define one in Services settings. A: Insert proper browser settings. Contact your service provider for instructions. See â Setting up the phone for the browser service â , p. 118 . Log ⢠Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may hav e activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logge d. To see all events, select Options â Filter â All communication. PC connectivity ⢠Q: Why do I have problems in connecting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that PC Suite fo r Nokia 3660 is installed and running on your PC. See the In stallation guide for PC Suite on the CD- ROM in the âÂÂInstall' section. For further
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Troubleshooting 144 information on how to us e the PC Suite for Nokia 366 0, see the PC suite online help . Access codes ⢠Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a co de, cont act y our network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not responding ⢠Q: How do I close an applicat ion that is not responding? A: Open the application switching window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to the application, and press to close the application.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Battery information 145 18. Battery information Charging and Discharging ⢠Your phone is powered by a rechargeable battery. ⢠Note that a new battery's full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles! ⢠The bat tery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually w e ar out. When the op erating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time t o buy a new battery. ⢠Use only batteries approved by the phone manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer. Unplug the charger when not in use. Do not leave the ba ttery connected to a charger for longer than a week, s ince overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. ⢠Te mperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. ⢠Use the battery only for its intended purpose. ⢠N ever use any charger or battery that is damaged. ⢠Do not short-circuit the battery. Accident al short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in y our pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. ⢠Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to ke ep the battery betwee n 15ðC an d 25ðC (59ð F and 77ðF). A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the battery is fully charged. BatteryâÂÂs performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. ⢠Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! ⢠Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (e.g. recycling). Do not dispose of as household waste. ⢠Remove the battery only when the phone is switched off.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Care and maintenance 146 19. Care and maintenance Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated w ith care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy t his product for many years. ⢠Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or sto re the phone in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the phone in ho t areas. High temperature s can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperat ure), moisture can form inside, which may damage electr onic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the phone. Non-expert handling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, knock or shak e the phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not paint the phone. Pain t can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operat ion. ⢠Use a soft, clean and dry clot h to clean the camera le ns. ⢠U se only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. U nauthorised a n tennas, modifications or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your phone, battery, charger or any access ory. If any of them are not working properly, take it to yo ur nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will ass ist you and, if ne cessary, arrange for service.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Important safety information 147 20. Important safety information Traffic Safety Do not use a hand-held telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remember road safety always comes first! Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. To maintain complianc e with RF exposure guidelines only use Nokia approved accessories. When the phone is on and being worn on the body, always use a Nokia approved carrying case. Parts of the phone are magnet ic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and pers ons with a hearing aid should not hold the phone to the ear wi th the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its holder, because metallic materials may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not place credi t cards or other magnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. Ho wever, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless phone. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consiste nt with the independent research by and recommendations of Wirele ss Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers: ⢠Should always keep the phone m o r e t h a n 2 0 c m ( 6 i n c h e s ) from their pacemaker when th e phone is switched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear o pposite the pacemaker to mi nimise the potential for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to su spect that interfe rence is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless phones may inte rfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interfe rence, you may want to consult your service provider. Other medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including cellular phones, may interfere with t he functionality of inadequately prot ected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of t he medical
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Important safety information 148 device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in health care fa cilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affec t im properly installed or inadequately shielded electroni c syst ems in motor vehicles (e.g. electronic fue l injection systems, e lectronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag syst ems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult th e manufacturer o f an y equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices s o require. Potentially explosive atmosp heres Switch off your phone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions . Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily in jury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a refuelling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrict ions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and di stribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explos ive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storag e facilities ; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals o r particles, such as grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service the phone, or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty whic h may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wir eless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids , gases or explosive materials in the same compartmen t as the phone, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an ai r bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wirele ss equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperl y installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your phone while in the air is prohib ited. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to th e operation of the aircraft, disrupt t he wireless telephone network and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instruct ions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone se rvices to the offender, or le gal action or both.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Important safety information 149 Emergency calls Important: This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio s ignals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-programmed fu nctions. Because of this, connections in all conditio ns can not be guaranteed. Therefore you should never r ely solely upon any wire less phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call: 1 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. 2 Press as many times as need ed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear th e display and ready the phone for calls. 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location (e.g. 112 or other official emerge ncy number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. Consult this guide and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as pos sible. Remember that your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE EU REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSU RE TO RADIO WAV ES. Your mobile phone is a radio transmitt er and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not t o exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy recommended by The Council of the European Unio n. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scien tific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific st udies. The limits include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit recommended by The Council of the European Union is 2.0 W/kg.* Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions wi th the phone tra nsmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determin ed at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while ope rating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple powe r levels so as to use only the power required to reach t he network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is avai l able for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Important safety information 150 shown. This directive i ncludes as one essential requirement the protection of the health an d the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for compl iance against the stan dard was 0.75 W/kg. While there may be differences betw een the SAR levels of various phones and at various posit ions, they all meet the EU requirements for RF exposure. This product meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm aw ay from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged ov er ten grams of tissue. The limit incorporates a substantia l margin of safety to give additional protection for the pub lic and to account for any variations in measurements. SA R values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other region s please look under product information at www.nokia.com.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 151 Index A Access codes 38 Access points 31 Settings 34 Settings, Advance d 36 Access points, glossary explanatio n 31 Accessories Settings 44 Activating loudspeaker 15 Alarm clock 112 Snooze 112 Animations 58 Answering a call 19 Automatic 44 Applications 125 Installing a Java application 126 Java application settings 127 Opening a Java application 127 Uninstalling a Java application 127 Attachments Retrieving 89 Viewing 89 Audio files See Media files Automatic answer 44 B Background image See Settings, General Barring calls 43 Battery information 145 Bluetooth 131 Cancelling pairing 135 Connection requests 134 Connection status indicators 134 Device icons 134 Disconnecting 136 Factory-set passcode 134 Pairing 134 Pairing requests 134 Passcode, glossary explanation 134 Receiving data 136 Sending data 133 Settings 132 Short names for paired devices 135 Unique device address 133 Bookmark, glossary explanation 119 Browser Browser access points, s ee Access points Connecting 118 Ending connections 123 Icons 119 WAP pages 117 XHTML pages 117 Browsing 120 Buffering Glossary explanation 66 Business card, glossary explanation 51 Sending 51 C Cache, glossary explanation 122 Calculator 108 Calendar 102 Alarm 105 Calendar entry fields 103 Data Import 107 Deleting many entries simultaneously 141 Remote synchronisat ion 139 Sending entries 105 Settings 105 Stopping alarms 105 Symbols 104 Views 104 Call barring 43 Call cost limit Resetting the counter 24 Set by a service provider 24 Call register See Log
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 152 Calling 17 With a voice tag 49 Calls Answering 19 Charging units 24 Conference calls 18 Cost limit 24 Dialled 22 Diverting 19 Duration 23 International 17 Missed 22 Options during a call 20 Received 22 Rejecting 19 Settings 29 Settings for diverting 21 Speed dialling 18 Transferring 20 Using the Contacts directory 17 Camera 53 Image types 55 Memory card 56 Memory consumption 56 Settings 54 CD-ROM 138 Cell broadcast messages 91 Cell info display 44 Certificates 41 Trust settings 42 Charges Packet data 33 Clearing memory Calendar entries 141 Log information 141 Clip See Video recorder Clock 112 Alarm 112 Settings 112 Composer 109 Adjusting sound volume 109 Adjusting tempo 109 Changing tone style 109 Listening to tones 109 Computer connections 138 Conference calls 18 Connection indicators Bluetooth 134 Data connections 10 Infrared 137 Connection set tings 31 Contact cards Adding voice tags 48 Assigning default numbers and addresses 47 Assigning speed dialling numbers 49 Attaching ringing tones 50 Changing voice tags 49 Deleting voice tags 49 Inserting pictures 46 Listening to voice tags 49 Remote synchronisation 139 Removing ring ing tones 50 Storing DTMF tones 21 Voice tags 48 Contact groups 51 Adding many members at the s a me time 52 Adding ringing tones 50 Removing members 52 Contacts Data Import 52 Converter 110 Adding exchange rates 111 Converting currenc ies 111 Converting units 110 Renaming cu rrencies 111 Copying Contacts betwee n the SIM card and phone memory 45 Text 73 Creating Contact cards 45 Cutting Text 74 D Data connections Indicators 10
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 153 Settings 31 Data Import Calendar and To-do 107 Contacts 52 Date, setti ngs 38 Deleting Calendar entries 103 Contact cards 46 Delivery reports 69 Dialled numbers 22 Digital rights management 123 Disconnectin g Bluetooth 136 Display settings 29 Diverting calls 19 DNS, Domain Name Service, glossary explanation 36 DRM 123 DTMF tones, glossary e xplanation 20 E Editing Calendar entries 102 Contact cards 46 Text 71 E-mail 80 Attachments 89 Deleting 90 Offline 87 Online 86 Opening 88 Remote mailbox 85 Retrieving from mailbox 87 Saving attachments 89 Settings 96 Emergency calls 149 Erasing Call cost counters 25 Log 25 Recent calls register 22 F Favourites 101 Adding a shortcut 101 File formats JAD and JAR 128 RealOne Player 63 SIS file 128 Supported 89 Fixed dialling 40 Folders, creating, organising items to folders 14 G Games 113 General settings 27 GIF animations 58 GPRS See Packet data H Handsfree See Loudspeaker Headset 15 High speed data, glossary explanation 32 HSCSD See High spe ed data I Idle state See Standby mode Image modes 55 Images 57 Adding to a contact card 46 Formats 59 Full scre en 58 Keyboard shortcuts when viewing images 59 Memory consumption 56 Moving the focus 58 Organising 59 Picture messages folder 60 Receiving from a digital camera 57 Rotating 58 Viewing image details 59 Zooming 58 Importing data from other Nokia phones 52, 107 Indicators 9 Data connections 10 Info service 91 Infrared 136 Installing software 129
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 154 Internet access points (IA P) See Access points IP address, glossary explanation 36 ISDN, glossary explanation 36 ISP See Internet service provider J JAD and JAR files 128 Java See Applications. JPEG, glossary explanation 53 L Language for writing 28 Limit for call costs 24 Listening to message s 18 Lock code 39 Log Erasing contents 25 Filtering 25 Recent calls 22 Settings 26 Loopset Activating 44 Loudspeaker 15 Activating 15 Turning off 15 M Mailbox 85 Disconnecting 88 Making calls 17 Media files File formats 63 Glossary explanation 63 Playing 64 Memory card 114 Backup 115 Camera 56 Consumption 116 Format 115 Password 116 Restore 115 Unlock 116 Video clips 114 Memory low Troubleshooting 141 Viewing memory consumption 116 , 130 Menu 10 Menu key 10 Rearranging the main Menu 11 Messaging Delivery reports 69 Inbox 81 Main view 68 Messages on the SIM card 91 Multimedia messages 76 My folders 85 Outbox 91 Picture messages 76 Saving picture message graphics 60 Sent folder settings 98 Settings 92 Text messages 75 Writing e-mail 80 Writing text 71 Missed calls 22 Modem Using your phone as a modem 138 Multimedia messages 76 Creating 78 Playing sounds 83 Viewing 82 Music files See Media files My folders 85 N Notes 112 O Offline 87 Online 86 Online help 12 Organising Menu 11 Outbox 91 P Packet data 32
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 155 Connection timer 26 Data counter 26 Glossary explanation 32 Pricing 33 Settings 37 Pairing, glossary explanation 134 Password Memory card 116 Pasting Text 74 PC Connecting 138 PC Suite for Nokia 3660 138 Phonebook See Contacts Pictures Taking 53 Viewing 57 PIN code 38 Unblocking 39 Playing video 62, 64 Predictive text input 71 Tips 72 Turning off 73 Prices for packet data 33 Profiles 99 Renaming 100 Settings 99 R RealOne Player 63 File formats 63 Media guide 64 Streaming 65 Volume control 66 Received calls 22 Receiving Data via Blueto oth 136 Data via infrared 137 Ringing tones, Operator logos, and settings, see Smart messages Recent calls register 22 Call charging units 24 Call cost limit 24 Call costs 23 Call duration 23 Dialled numbers 22 Erasing call lists 22 Missed calls 22 Received calls 22 Recorder, recording sounds 113 Recording video 61 Recording voice tags 48 Rejecting calls 19 Remote mailbox 85 Disconnecting 88 Remote synchronisation 138 Removing software 130 Reports 69 Resolution, glossary explanation 55 Ringing tones 99 Adding a personal ringing tone 50 Muting 19 Receiving in a smart message 83 Settings 99 S Safety information Care and maintenanc e 146 Electronic devices 147 Emergency calls 149 Operating environment 147 Potentially explosive at mospheres 148 Traffic safety 147 Vehicles 148 Screen saver Settings 29 Search field 14 Security Access codes 38 Security certificates 41 Settings 38 Sending Calendar entries 105 Contact cards, Bu siness cards 51 Data via B l uetooth 133 Data via infrared 137 Media files 66 Video clips 62, 66 Service command editor 92 Service message
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 156 Settings 97 Service messages 84 Service provider for data connections, glossary explanation 31 Settings 27 Access codes 38 Accessories 44 Applications (Javaâ¢) 127 Bluetooth 132 Calendar 105 Call barring 43 Call diverting 21 Camera 54 Certificates 41 Clock 112 Connection 31 Date and time 38 Device settin gs 27 Display 29 E-mail 96 Fixed dialling 40 General 27 Info service 98 Lock code 39 Log 26 Messaging 92 Messaging, Sent folde r 98 PIN code 38 RealOne Player 67 Security 38 Service messages 97 Sounds 99 Text messages 93 Video recorder 62 Shared memory 16 Shortcuts in Favourites 101 in Images 59 SIM card Copying names and numbers 45 Messages 91 Names and numbers 26 Viewing messages on SIM 26 SIS file 128 Smart messages Receiving 83 Sending 75 Snooze 112 Software Installing 129 Removing 130 Transferring a .SIS file to your phone 129 Sound files See Media files Sounds 99 Removing a personal ringing tone 50 Speed dialling 49 Making calls 18 Standby mode 8 Indicators 9 Settings 28 Stopping Alarm clock 112 Calendar alarm 105 Streaming Glossary explanation 65 Switching between applicat ions 12 Symbols for Calendar entries 104 Synchronisation See Remote synchronisation. SyncML See Remote synchronisation. T Taking pictures 53 Text input 71 Text message service centre Adding new 93 Text messages 75 Writing and sending 75 Text templates 85 Thumbnails In a contact card 46 Time, settings 38 To-do 106 Data Import 107 Tones 99 Tools
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 157 See Manager - installing applications and software chapter Traditional text input 71 Transferring calls 20 Troubleshooting 141 U Unit converter 110 USSD commands 92 V vCard format 51 Video clips See Media files Video player See RealOne Player Video recorder 61 Memory card 62 Saving video clips 62 Sending video clips 62 Settings 62 Video clips 62 Viewing GIF animations 58 Images 57 Voice dialling 48 Voice ma ilbox 18 Changing the number 18 Diverting calls to voice mailbo x 21 Voice messages 18 Voice recorder 113 Voice tags 48 Adding 48 Changing 49 Deleting 49 Glossary explanation 45 Listening 49 Making calls 49 Volume con trol 14 During a call 17 W WAP pages Browser 117 Writing 71 Predictive text input 71 Predictive text input, tu rning off 73 Traditional text input 71 X XHTML browser 117 XHTML glossary explanation 117 XHTML pages Browser 117 Z Zooming 58
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORP ORATION declar e under our s ole responsibi lity that the p roduct NHL-8 is in conformi ty with the provisio ns of the follow ing Council Directi ve: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found from http://www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribut ion or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form witho ut the pri or w ritten permis sion of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting Peopl e and Xpress-on are register ed trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names me ntioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their resp ective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Ltd é 1998-2002 é 1998-2002 Symbian Ltd. All rights reserved. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbia n Ltd. All rights reserved. Java⢠and all Java- based mar ks are tr ademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems , Inc. USE OF THIS PRODU CT IN ANY MANNER TH AT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHI BITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OB TAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPR ISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPEC IFICALLY AND SEPARAT ELY LICENSED BY MPE G LA, L.L.C. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporatio n. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 51 26739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, a nd 5414425. Other p atents pen din g. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd . 1998. All rights reserved. m-Router Connectivity Components é 2000-2002 Intuwave Limited. All rights rese rved. (www.intuwave.com) US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2003. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the righ t to make changes and improvements to any of the prod ucts describe d in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any specia l, incidental, conseq uential or i ndirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this docum ent are provided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. Ex cept as required by appl icable law, no warranti es of any kind, either exp ress or implied, includi ng, but not limit ed to, the impl ied warranti es of merchantabi lity and fitn ess for a pa rticular purpose, are made in r elation to the accura cy, relia bi lity or contents of this document . Nokia reserves the rig ht to revise this docum ent or withdraw it at any time w ithout prior notice The availability o f particular pr oducts may vary by regi on. Please check with t he Nokia dealer near est to you. 9362394 Issue 2 EN
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contents For your safety ....................................... .... 6 General information .................................. 8 Standby mode ........... ...................... ............ ........... ......... ........ 8 Menu ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ... 10 Options lists ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... ....... 12 Online help........ ........... ........... ............ ........... ......... ........... ... 12 Navigation bar - movin g horizontally.... .............. ......... 13 Actions common to all application s ..................... ......... 13 Volume cont rol ................ ......... ........... ........... ............ ......... 14 Shared memory........... ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ... 16 Your phone .............. ................................ 17 Making a call............. ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ... 17 Answering a call ................ ........... ............ ........... ......... ....... 19 Log - Call register and genera l log ..... ............. .............. 21 SIM folder ........... ........... .................................. ............ ......... 26 Settings .................................................... 27 Changing general se ttings ...... ........... .............. ........... ..... 27 Phone settings ................. ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... 27 Call settings ............... ........... ......... ............ ........... ......... ....... 29 Connection settings .................. ........... ............ ........... ....... 31 Date and time ............... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... 38 Security .............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ........... ........... ... 38 Call barring (network service) ........... ............ ........... ........43 Network ........ ......... ............ ........... ......... ........... ......... ............ .43 Accessory settings ................ ............ ........... ........... ............ .44 Contacts .......................... ......................... 45 Creating contact ca rds ................. ............ ........... ........... ....45 Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory..................... ......... ........... ........... ............ ......... ..........45 Editing contact cards ........... ............ ........... ........... ............ .46 Viewing a contact card .......... ............. ............ ........... ........47 Managing contact groups ......... ............ ........... ............. ....51 Camera and Images ................................ 53 Taking pictures ............. ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ .53 Images - Storing pictures............ ............ ............. ............ .57 Video recorder ........................ ................. 61 Recording a video clip .................. ............ ........... ........... ....61 Watching a video clip...... ........... ....................... ........... ......62 Sending video clips ........ ...................... ....................... ........ 62 Setting up your Video recorder....... ........... ............ ..........62 RealOne Playerâ¢..................................... . 63 Media Guide ......... ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ......... .64 Playing media files .. ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ....64 Sending media files................... ........... ............ ........... ........66
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Changing the settings. .......... ........... ............ ........... ........... 67 Messaging . ............................... ................ 68 Messaging - General informat ion ......... .............. ........... 69 Writing text ............. ............ ......... ........... ........... ............ ...... 71 Creating and sending ne w messages......... .............. ...... 74 Inbox - receivin g messages ................. ........... ............ ...... 81 My folders ........... ........... ........... .................................. ......... 85 Remote mailbox . .............. ............ .................................. ...... 85 Outbox ............ ........... ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ...... 91 Viewing messages on a SIM card ................. ............ ...... 91 Cell broadcast (netw ork service) ............ ............ ............. 91 Service command editor... ...................... ..................... ...... 92 Messaging se ttings .............. ........... ........... ............ ........... .. 92 Profiles .............................. ........................ 99 Changing the profile ........... ........... .............. ........... ........... 99 Customising profiles ....... ............ .................................. ...... 99 Favourites .. ...................................... ...... 101 Adding shortcuts ........... ........... ............ ...................... ...... 101 Calendar and To-do ......... ..................... 102 Creating calendar entries................... ........... ........... ...... 102 Setting calendar alarms ... ........... ........... .............. .......... 105 To-do ............. ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........ 106 Importing data from other Nokia phone s ....... .......... 107 Extras ................................ ..................... 108 Calculator ................. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ .... 108 Composer.................... ....................... .................. ......... ....... 109 Converter .................. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ .... 110 Notes ....... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... .......... ........... .. 112 Clock ............... ........... ............ ......... ........... ........... ......... ....... 112 Recorder........... ........... ............ ......... ........... ............ ........... .. 113 Games................. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... .. 113 Memory card ............. ............ ........... ........... .......... ........... .. 114 Services (XHTML) ..................................117 Basic steps for accessing ............ ........... ............ ........... .. 117 Setting up the phone for the browser service .......... 118 Making a connection .............. ............ ........... ........... ....... 118 Connection security ..... ........... ............ ........... ........... ....... 119 Viewing bookmarks ........... ...................... .................. ....... 119 Browsing ............ ......... ............ ........... ........... ............ ......... .. 120 Viewing saved pages ............. ........... .............. ........... ....... 121 Downloading .................... ............ ......... ........... ........... ....... 122 Ending a connection .................... ........... ............ ........... .. 123 Browser settings................. ........... ........... ............ ........... .. 123 Applications (Javaâ¢) ............................. 125 Installing a Java applic ation ........ ........................... ....... 126 Java application settings ............ ........... .................. ....... 127 Manager - installing applications and software .................................. ...............128 Installing software ........ ........... ....................... ........... ....... 129
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Removing software ....... ........... ............ ........... ........... ...... 130 Viewing memory consumption .................. ............. ...... 130 Connectivity .......... ................................ 131 Bluetooth connection ....... ............ ............. ............ .......... 131 Infrared connection................ .............. ........... ........... ...... 136 Connecting your phone to a computer ......... ............. 138 Sync - remote synchronisation .................. ............. ...... 138 Troubleshooting ..... ............................... 141 Q&A.............. ............ ........... ......... ........... ............ ......... .........142 Battery information...................... ........ 145 Care and maintenance ......................... 146 Important safety information ............. 147 Index ............... ....................................... 151
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 6 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further de tailed information is given in this manual. Please refer to the Quick star t guide of the product for instructions on operation, care and maintenance, including important s afety information. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY C OMES FIRST Don't use a hand-held phone while driving. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in air craft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use the phone at a refuelling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NE AR BLASTING Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. Obser ve restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position. Don't to uch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repa ir phone equipment. ACCESSORIES A ND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make ba ckup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other de vice, read its user's guide for deta iled safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CALLING Ensure the phon e is swi tched on a nd in service. Enter the phone nu mber, including
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 7 the area code, then press . To end a call, press . To answer a call, press . EMERGENCY CA LLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until told to do so. Network Services The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900 and GSM 1800 and 1900 networks. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are sp ecial servic es that you arrange through you r wireless se rvice provide r. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them throug h your service provider and obtain instructi ons for their u se from your serv ice provider. Note: Some networks may not support all language-dependent charac ters and/or services. Chargers and accessories Note: Check the model number of any charger before use with this device . This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-8, ACP-12, LCH-9 a nd LCH-12. WARNING! Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and honor privacy a nd legitima te rights of others.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 8 1. General information Nokia 3660 provides various functions, whic h are very handy for daily use, such as Camera, Video recorder, Messagin g, e-mail, Cl ock, alarm clock, Calculator, and Calendar. Stickers in the sales package ⢠The stickers included in the sales packag e contain important information for service and customer support purposes. The sales package also includes instructions on how you should use these stickers. Standby mode The indicators described below are shown wh en the phone is re ady for use, with no characters keyed in. In this state, th e phone is in âÂÂstandby modeâÂÂ. In Fig. 1 : A Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at y our current location. The higher the bar, the stronger the signal. Th e antenna symbol is replaced with the GPRS symbol when GPRS connection has been set to When available and a connection is available in the network or in the current cell. See â Packet data (General Packe t Radio Service, GPRS) â , p. 32 and â GPRSâ , p. 37 . B Shows an analogue or a digital clock. See also settings for â Date and time â , p. 38 and settings for Standby mode â Background image, p. 28 . C Indicates in which cellu lar network the phone is currently being used. D Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar, the more power left in th e battery. E Navigation bar: shows the currently acti ve profile. If the selected profile is General , the current date is displayed instead of the profile name. For further information, see â Navigation bar - moving horizontally â , p. 13 and â Profilesâ , p. 99 . Fig. 1 Standby mode with a background image.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 9 Tip! You can change the selection key shortcuts and the background image. See the setting s for â Standby mode â , p. 28 . F Shows the current shortcuts assigned for the selection keys and . Note: Your phone has a screen saver. If ther e are no actions f or five minutes, the display is cleared and a screen saver becomes visi ble. See p. 29 . To deactivate the screen saver, press any key. Indicators related to actions One or more of the following icons may be shown when the phone is in standby mode: - Indicates that you ha ve received new me ssages to the I nbox in Messaging. If the indicator is blinking, the phone memory is lo w and you must delete s ome data. For further information, see â Memory low â , p. 141 . - Indicates that you ha ve received new e-mail. - Indicates that you ha ve received one or se veral voice messages. See â Calling your voice mailbox â , p. 18 . - Indicates that there are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See p. 69 . - Shown when Incoming call alert has been set to Silent and Message alert tone to Off in the currently active profile. See â Profiles â , p. 99 . - Indicates that the pho neâÂÂs keypad is locked. See the Quick start guide. - Indicates that y ou have an activ e alarm. See â Clock â , p. 112 . - Indicates that Bluetooth is active. Note th at, when data is transmitted via Bluetooth, is shown. - Indicates that all calls to the phone are dive rted. - Indicates that all calls to the phone are diverted to a voice mailbox. See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . If you have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the first line is and for the second line . See â Line in use (network service) â , p. 30 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 10 - Indicates that you can make calls usin g phone line 2 only (network service). See â Line in use (net work se rvice) â , p. 30 . Data connection indicators ⢠When an application is establishing a data connection, one of the indicators below blinks in standby mode. ⢠When an indicator is show n continuously, the connec tion is active. for a data call , for a high sp eed data call, is shown instead of the antenna symbol wh en there is an active GPRS connection. for when the G PRS connection is put on hold during voice calls. for a fax call, for a Bluetooth connection, and for an infra red connec tion. Menu ⢠Press (Menu key) to open the main Me nu. In the Menu, you can access all the applications in your phone. See Fig. 2 , p. 10 . Options in the Menu: Open , List view / Grid view , Delete , Move , Move to folder , New folder , Rename , Help , and Exit . Moving in the Menu ⢠Press the scroll key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with blue arrows 1 to 4 in Fig. 3 , p. 11 ) to move in the Menu. Opening applications or fo lders ⢠Scroll to an application or a folder and pres s the scroll key in the middle (shown with blue arrow 5 in Fig. 3 , p. 11 ) to open it. Fig. 2 The main Menu.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 11 Closing applications ⢠Backstep by pressing Back as man y times as is needed to return to standby mode or select Options â Exit . If you press and hold , the phone returns to standby mode and the application is left open in the background. Note: Pressing will always end a call, even if another applicat ion is active and displayed on the display. When you switch the phone off, applications are closed and any unsaved data is saved automatically. Rearranging the Menu You can rearrange the Menu in a ny order you like. You can place more rarely used applications in folders and move applications that you use more often from a folder to the Menu. You can also create new folders. Tip! Sele ct Options â List view if you want to view the applications in a list. 1 Scroll to the item you wa nt to move and select Options â Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. 2 Move the selection where you want the application to be and press OK . Fig. 3 Using the scroll key to move. 1 2 3 4 5
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 12 Switching between applications If you have several applications open and want to switch from one application to another: Press and hold (Menu key). The application switching window opens showing a list of applications th at are currently open. See Fig. 4 , p. 12 . Scroll to an application and press to go to it. Note: If memory is getting low, the phone may close some applic ations. The phone saves any unsaved data before an application is closed. Options lists In this UserâÂÂs Guide, you can se e the Option s list commands listed on the side of the page. These lists tell you which co mmands are avai lable in different views and situations. Note: The available commands change depe nding on the view you are in. Options Tip! In some situations, when you press the scroll key, a shorter options list appears listing the main comma nds available in the view. Online help Your Nokia 3660 has a help function that yo u can access from any application which has the Options selection, and can be accessed using the key. See Fig. 5 , p. 13 . Fig. 4 Application switching window
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 13 Navigation bar - moving horizontally In the navigation bar, you can see: ⢠small arrows or tabs which te ll you if there are more views, folders, or files you can move to. See Fig. 6 , p. 13 . ⢠editing indicat ors, see â Writing text â , p. 71 . ⢠other information, for example, in Fig. 6 ., 2/14 means that the current picture is the second of 14 pictures in the f older . Press to see the next picture. Actions common to all applications ⢠Opening item s for viewing - When you are view ing a list of files or folders, to open an item, scroll t o an item and press the scroll key or select Options â Open . ⢠Editin g items - To open an item for editing, you sometimes need to first open it for viewing and then select Options â Edit , if you want to change its contents. ⢠Renaming items - To give a new name to a file or folder, scroll to it and select Options â Rename . ⢠Removing, deleting items - Scroll to the item and select Options â Delete or press . To delete many items at a time, you first need to mark them. See the next paragraph: âÂÂMarking an itemâÂÂ. ⢠Marking an item - There are several ways to sele ct items when you are in a list. ⢠To select one item at a time, scroll to it and select Options â Mark/Unmark â Ma rk or press and the scroll key at the same time. A check mark is placed next to the item. ⢠To select all i tems in the list, se lect Options â Mark/Un mark â Mark all . Tip! For information on how to insert text and numbers, see â Writing text â , p. 71 . ⢠Marking multiple items - Press and hold and at the s ame time move the scroll key down or up. As the selectio n moves, a check mark is placed next to the items. To end the selection, stop the scrolling with the scroll key and then release . After you have selected all the items you want, you can move or delete them by selecting Option s â Move to folder or Delete. Fig. 5 Online help topic. Fig. 6 Arrows and tabs on the navigation bar.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 14 ⢠To unmark an item, scroll to it and s elect Options â Mark/Unmark â Unma rk or press and the scroll key at the same time. ⢠Creating folder s - To create a new folder, select Options â New folder . You are asked to give a name to the folder (max. 35 letters). ⢠Moving items to a folder - To move items to a folder or between folders, select Options â Move to folder (not shown if th ere are no folders available). When you select Move to folder , a list of available folders opens and you can also see the root level of the application (for moving an item out of a folder). Select the location you want the item to be moved to and press OK . Searching for items You can search for a name, file, folder, or shortcut by using the search field. In some situations the search field is not visi ble automa tically, and you can acti vate it by selecting Options â Find or just by starting to key in letters. 1 To search for an item, start to key i n text in the search field. The phone immediately starts to search for matches and mo ves the selection on the best match. See Fig. 7 , p. 14 . To make the search more accurate, key in more letters and t he selection moves to the item that best matches the letters. 2 When the correct item is f ound, press to open it. Volume control ⢠When you have an active call or are listeni ng to a sound, press or to increase or decrease the volume level, respectively . Fig. 7 Search field in Contacts
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. General information 15 Loudspeaker Voice v olume ico ns : - for earpiece mode , - for loudsp eaker mode. See also Fig. 8 , p. 15 . Your phone has a loudspeaker f or handsfree us e. Th e loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the phone from a short distance with out having to hold the phone to your ear, for example, having it on a table nearby. The loudspeaker can be used during a call, with sound applications, and when viewing multim edia messages. RealOne P layer⢠uses the loudspeaker by default when you watch a video. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to use other applications while in a call. Activating the loudspeaker To change to using the loudspeaker during an already active call, select Options â Activate loudsp. . A tone is played, is shown in the navigation bar, and the volume indicator changes. See Fig. 8 , p. 15 . Note: The loudspeaker cannot be activated when you have connected a headset to the phone. Important: Do not hold the phone near to your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. The loudspeaker needs to be activated separate ly each time for phone calls, but the sound applications such as Com poser and Recorder use the loudspeaker by default. Turning off the loudspeaker ⢠When you have an active call, select Options â Activate. handset . Headset mode To adjust the volume level when a headset is connected to your phone, press or or use the headsetâÂÂs keys, if available. Fig. 8 Volume indicators for e arpiece and loudspeaker modes are shown in the navigation bar.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. General information 16 Shared memory The following features in your phone use shared memory: contacts, text messages, multimedia messages, images and ringing tones, Video recorder, RealOne Playerâ¢, calendar and to-do notes, and downloaded a pplications. Using any of t hese features leaves less memory for other features. This is especially true with heavy use of any of the features. For example, saving many images ma y take all of the shared memory and your phone may display that the memory is full. In this case, delete some of the information or entries reserving the shar ed memo ry.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 17 2. Your phone Making a call Tip! To adjust the volume during a call, press to increase and to decrease the volume level. 1 In standby mode key in the phone number , including the area code. Press or to move the cursor. Press to remove a number. ⢠For international calls, press twice for the international prefix (the character replaces the inter national acce ss code) and then k ey in the country code, the ar ea code without 0 , and the phone number. Note: Calls described here as internatio nal may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Normal positi on: Hold the phone as you would hold any other telephone. Note: Pressing will always end a call, even if another applicat ion is active and displayed. To make a ca ll using voic e tags, see â Making a call by sa ying a voice tag â , p. 49 . Making a call using the Contacts directory 1 To open the Contacts directory , go to Menu â Contacts . 2 To find a contact, scroll to the desired name . Or, key in the first letters of the name. The Search field opens au tomatically and matching contacts are listed. 3 Press to start the call. If the contact has more than one phone number, scroll to the number and press to start the call. Fig. 1 Making a call.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 18 Calling your voice mailbox Tip! If your voice mail requires you to enter a password every tim e you call to listen to your voice messages, you may want to add a DTMF number after the voice mailbox number. This way the password is given automatically every time you call your voice mail. For example, 44123 4567p1234# where 1234 is the password and âÂÂpâ inserts a pause. The voice mailbox (network service) is an answering machine where callers who are unable to reach you can leave you voice messages. ⢠To call your voice mailbox, pr ess and in standby mode. ⢠If the phone asks fo r the voice ma ilbox number, key it in and press OK . You can obtain this number from your service provider. See also â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . Each phone line may have its own voice mailb ox number, see â Line in use (network service) â , p. 30 . Changing the voice m ailbox number To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, go to Menu â Tools â Voice mailbox and select Options â Change number . Key in the number (obtained from your service provider) and press OK . Speed dialling a phone number To view the speed dialling grid, go to Menu â Tools â Speed dial . 1 Assign a phone number to one of the speed dialling keys ( - ), see â Assignin g speed dialling keys â , p. 49 . 2 To call the number: In standby mode, pres s the corresponding speed dialling key and . If the Speed dialling function is set to On : Press and hold the corresponding sp eed dialling key until the call is started. Making a conference call Conference calling is a network servic e that allows you to make a conference call with a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 1 Make a call to the first participant.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 19 2 To make a call to a new participant, select Options â New call . Key in or search the memory fo r the phone num ber of the participant and press OK . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call has been answered, join th e first participant in the conference call. Select Options â Conference . 4 To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2 and then select Option s â Conferen ce â Add to conference . ⢠To have a private conversation with one of the participants: Select Options â Conferen ce â Private . Scroll to the desired participant and press Private . The conference call is put on hold in your ph one, and the other participants can still continue talking with each other while you have a private discussion with one participant only. Once you have finish ed the private conversation, select Options â Add to conference to return to the conference call. ⢠To drop one participant from the conference call, select Options â Conferenceâ Drop participant , then scroll to the participant and press Drop . Tip! The quickest way to make a new call is to dial the numb er and press to start t he call. The existing call is automatically put on hold. 5 To end the active conference call, press . Answering a call ⢠To answer an incoming call, press . ⢠To end the call, press . If you do not want to answer a call, press . The caller will hear a âÂÂline busyâ tone. Tip! If you have ac tivated the Call divert â If busy function to div ert calls, for example, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the cal l. See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . When a call comes in, press Mute to quickly mut e the ringing tone. Fig. 2 Conference call with two participants.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 20 Tip! To adjust the phone tones for different environments and events, for example, when you want your phone to be silent, see â Profiles â , p. 99 . Note: It is possible that the phone assigns a wrong name for the phone number. This happens if the phone nu mber of the caller is not stored in Contacts but the seven last digits of the number match anot h er nu m be r th a t i s s t or e d i n C o n ta ct s . In this case, call identification is not correct. Call waiting (network service) Tip! To end both calls at the same time, select Options â End all calls and press OK . If you have activated the Call waiting service, the network will notify you of a new incoming call while you hav e a call in progress. See â Call waiting: (network service) â , p. 29 . 1 During a call, press to answer the wait ing call. The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, press Swap . 2 To end the active call, press . Options during a call Many options that you can use during a call are networ k services. Press Options duri ng a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , End active call , End all calls , Hold or Unhold , New call , Conferen ce , Privat e , Drop participant , Answer , and Reject . Swap is used to switch between the active call and the call on hold. Transfer is used to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from b oth calls. Send DTMF is used to send DTMF tone strings, for example, passwords or bank account numbers. Glossary: DTMF tones are the tones you hear when you press the number keys on the phone keypad. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes and computerised telephony systems, for example. 1 Key in the digits with - . Each keystroke generates a DTM F tone, which is transmitted while the call is active . Press repeatedly to produce: * , p (inserts a Fig. 3 O ptions d uring a call.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 21 pause of approximately two seconds befo re, or between DTMF characters.), and w (if you use this character, the remainin g sequence is not sent until you press Send again during the call). Press to produce # . 2 To send the tone, press OK . Tip! You can also store a sequence of DT MF tones for a contact ca rd. When you make a call to the contac t, you can retrie ve the sequence. Add DTMF tones to the phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Settings for call diverting When this n etwork servic e is activa ted, you can direct your incomin g calls to a nother number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For details, contact your service provider. Go to Menu â Tools â Call divert . ⢠Select one of the divert options, for example, select If busy t o divert voi ce calls when your number is busy or when you reject incoming calls . ⢠Select Options â Activate to set the divert setting on, Cancel to set the divert setting off, or Check status to check whether the divert is activated or not. ⢠To cancel all active diverts, select Options â Cancel all diverts . For information about the divert indicators, see â Indicators related to actions â , p. 9 . Note: You cannot have barring of incoming ca lls and call diverting active at the same time. See â Call barring (network serv ice) â , p. 43 . Log - Call register and general log Go to Menu â Log . In the log you can monitor phone calls, text messages, packet data connections, and fax and data calls registered by the phone. You ca n filter the log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 22 Tip! To view a list of sent messages, go to Messaging â Sent . Note: Connections to your remote mailbox, multimedia messaging cen tre, or browser pages are shown as da ta calls or packet data connections in the general communications log. Recent calls register Go to Menu â Log â Recent calls . The phone registers the phone numbers of mi ssed, received, and dialled calls, and the approximate duration and cost of your calls . The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network supp orts these functions, and th e phone is switched on and within the networkâÂÂs service area. Options in the Missed, Received, Dialled views: Call , Use number , Delete , Clear list , Add to Contacts , Help , and Exit . Missed calls and received calls To view a list of the last 20 phone numbers from which so mebody has tried to call y ou without success (network service), go to Log â Recent calls â Missed calls . Tip! When you see a note in standby mode about missed calls, press Show to a c c e s s t h e l i s t o f m i s s e d c a l l s . T o c a l l b a c k , s c r o l l t o t h e n u m b e r o r n a m e y o u w a n t and press . To view a list of the 20 numbers or names fr om which you ha ve most recently accepted calls (network service), go to Log â Recent calls â Received calls . Dialled numbers Icons: fo r misse d, for Received, and for Dialled num bers views. Tip! Press in standby mode to open the Dialled numbers view. See Fig. 4 , p. 24 . To view the 20 phone num bers that you have most recently called or attempted to call, go to Log â Recent calls â Dialled nos. Erasing recent ca ll lists ⢠To clear all recent call lists, select Options â Clear recent calls in the Recent calls main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 23 ⢠To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase and select Options â Clear list . ⢠To clear an individual event, open a re gister, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration Go to Menu â Log â Call duration . Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. Tip! To see the call duration timer while you have an active call, select Options â Settings â Show call duration â Yes . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, ro unding-off for billing, and so forth. Erasing call duration timers - Select Options â Cl ear timers . For this you need the lock code, see â Security â , p. 38 . To clear an individual even t, scroll to it and press . Call costs (network service) Go to Log â Call costs . Call costs allows you to chec k the cost of the last call or all ca lls. The call costs are displayed separately for each SIM card.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 24 Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, roundin g-off for billing, taxes and so forth. Call costs limit set by a service provid er Your service provider can limit the cost of your calls to a certain amount of charging units or units of currency. When the limited charging mode is active, calls can be made only as long as the preset credit limit (call cost limit) is not exceeded and you are in a network that supports call cost limit. The number of re maining units is shown during a call and in standby mode. When the charging units have expired, the note Call cost limit reached is displayed. Cont act your service prov ider fo r information on the limited charging mode and charging unit prices. Cost shown as ch arging units or currency ⢠You can set the phone to show the remainin g talk-time in charging units or units of currency. For this, you may ne ed the PIN2 code, see p. 39 . 1 Select Options â Settingsâ Show costs in . The options are Currency and Units . 2 If you choo se Currency , a note requesting you to write the unit price is shown. Key in the cost of your home network charging or credit unit and press OK . 3 Write a name for the currency. Use a th ree-letter abbreviation, for example, GBP. Note: When no more cha rging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emergency number programme d into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Setting a call cost limit for yourself 1 Select Options â Settings â Call cost limit â On. 2 The phone requests you to enter the limit in units. For this you may need the PIN2 code. Depending on the Show costs in setting, enter either the amount of charging units or curren cy. When the charging limit you have set yourse lf is reached, the counter stops at its maximum value and the note Reset all calls' cost counter is displayed. To be abl e to make Fig. 4 The Dialled numbers view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Your phone 25 calls, go to Options â Settings â Call cost limit â Off . For this you need the PIN2 code, see p. 39 . Erasing call cost counters - Select Options â Cle ar counters . For this you need the PIN2 code, see p. 39 . To clear an individual even t, scroll to it and pres s . GPRS data counter Go to Log â GPRS counter . Allows you to check the amount of data se nt and received during packet data (GPRS) connections. For examp le, you may be charged for your GPRS connections by the amount of data sent and received. Viewing the general log Go to Menu â Log and press . In the general log, for each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the servic e provider, or access point. See Fig. 5 , p. 26 . Icons: for incoming, for outgoing, and for missed communication events. Note: Sub-events, such as a text message sent in more than one part an d packet data connections, are logged as one communication event . Filtering the log 1 Select Options â Filter . A list of filters opens. 2 Scroll to a filter and press Select . Erasing the conten ts of the log ⢠To erase all the log contents, Recent calls register, and Messag ing deli very reports permanently, select Options â Clear log . Confirm by pressing Yes .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Your phone 26 Packet data counter and connection timer ⢠To view how much data, measured in kiloby t es, has been transferre d and how long a certain GPRS connection has lasted, sc roll to an Incoming or Outgoing event with the access point icon and select Optio ns â View details . Log settings ⢠Select Options â Settings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log duration - The log events remain in the ph one memory for a set number of days after which they are automati cally erased to free memory. Note: If you select No log , all the log contents, Rece nt calls register, and Messaging delivery reports are permanently delet ed. â¢F o r Call duration , Show costs in , Call c ost limit , see the sections â Call duration â and â Call costs (network service) â earlier in this chapter. SIM folder Go to Menu â SIM . Your SIM card may provide additional services that you can access in this folder. See also â Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory â , p. 45 , âÂÂConfirm SIM service actionsâÂÂ, p. 40 , âÂÂFixed dialling settingsâÂÂ, p. 40 , and â Viewing messages on a SIM cardâ , p. 91 . Options in the SIM directory: Open , Call, New SIM contact , Edit , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Copy to Contacts , My numbers , SIM details , Help , and Exit . Note: For availability, rates and information on using SIM services, c ontact your SIM card vendor, e.g. network operator , service provider or other vendor. ⢠In the SIM director y, you can see the name s and numbers stored on the SIM card, you can add or edit them, and you can make calls. Fig. 5 The general log.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 27 3. Settings Changing general settings Go to Menu â Tools â Settings . 1 Scroll to a setting group and press to open it. 2 Scroll to a setting you want t o change and press to ⢠switch between options if there are only two ( On / Off ). ⢠open a list of options or an editor. ⢠open a slider view, press or t o i n c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e the value, respectively, see Fig. 1 , p. 27 . Note: You may be able to receive some settin gs from your service provider in a text message. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . Phone settings General ⢠Phone language - You can cha nge the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the format used for date and time an d the separators used, for example, in calculations. There are three languages installed in your phone. If you select Automatic , the phone selects the language acco rding to the informa tion on your SIM card. After you have changed the disp lay text language, you must restart the phone. Note: Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your phone and th e change remains effective until you change these settings again. Fig. 1 A setting slider.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 28 ⢠Writing language - You can change the writing language of your phone permanently. Changing the language affects ⢠the characte rs available when you press an y key ( - ), ⢠the predictive text dictionary used, and Tip! You can also make this change in so me of the editors. Press and select Writin g language: . ⢠the special charac ters that are available when you press the and keys. Example: You are using a p hone where the display texts are in En glish but you want to write all your messages in French. After you change the language, the predictive text dictionary searches fo r words in French and the most common special characters or punctuation mark s used in the French language are available when you press the and keys. ⢠Dictionary - To set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the phone. You can also change this setting when you are in an editor. Press and select Dictionary â Dictionary on or Off . Note: The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. ⢠Welcome note or logo - Press to open the setting. The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Select Default if you want to use the default image or animation. Select Text to write a welco me note (max. 50 letters). Select Image to select a photo or picture from Images . ⢠Orig. phone settings - You can reset some of the settin gs to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See p. 39 . After resetting the settings, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Note: All documents and files that you ha ve created are left as they are. Standby mode ⢠Background image - You can select any im age to be used as a background image in standby mode. Select Yes to select an image from Images . ⢠Left selection key and Right selection key - You can change the shortcuts that appear over the left and right sele ction keys in standby mode. In addition to the applications, you can have the shortcut po int to a function, for example, New message.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 29 Note: You cannot have a shor tcut to an application that you have installed. Display ⢠Contrast - To change the contrast of the di splay to li ghter or darker. See Fig. 1 , p. 27 . ⢠Colour palette - To change the colour pa lette used on the display. ⢠Screen saver timeout - The screen saver is activated when the screen saver time-out period is over. When the screen saver is ac tive, the display is cleared and you can see the screen saver bar. See Fig. 2 , p. 29 . ⢠To deactivate the screen saver press any key. ⢠Screen saver - Select what is shown on the scre en saver bar: time and date or a text you have wr itten yoursel f. See Fig. 2 , p. 29 . The location and background colour of t he screen saver bar changes in one minute inte rvals. Also, the screen saver changes to indicate the number of new messages or missed calls. Call settings Note: To change the settings for call diverting, go to Menu â Tools â Call divert . See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 . Send my caller ID ⢠This network service allows you to se t your phone number to be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person to whom you are callin g. Or, the value may be set by y our network operator or service provider when you make a subscri ption ( Set by network ). Call wa iting : (network service) ⢠The network will notify you of a new inco ming call while you have a call in progress. Select: Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deactivate call waiting, or Check status , to check if the function is active or not. Fig. 2 The screen save r.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 30 Automatic redial ⢠When this setting is acti vate d, your phone will make a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful ca ll attempt. Press to stop automatic redialling. Summary after call ⢠Activate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the duration and cost of the last c all. To s how costs, the Call cost limit needs to be act ivated for your SIM card. See p. 24 . Speed dialling ⢠Select On and the numbers assigned to the sp eed dialling keys ( - ), can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also â Assign ing speed dialli ng keys â , p. 49 . Anykey answer ⢠Select On , and you can a nswer an incoming call by briefly press ing any key, ex cept , , and . Line in use (network service) Voice message indicators: , , or is shown if you have one or several voice messages. ⢠This setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subsc riber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) you want to use for making calls and sending text mes sages. Calls on bo th lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. Note: You will not be able to make c alls if you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service. Tip: To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in standby mode. To prevent line selection, select Lin e change â Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 31 Connection General information about data connections and access points Glossary: Access point - The point where your phone connects to the Internet by way of a data call or packet data connection. An access point can be provided, for example, by a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider for mobile de vices, or ne twork operato r. To define settings for access points, go to Settings â Connection â Access points . A data connection is required to connect to an access po int. Your phone supports t hree kinds of data connections: ⢠a GSM data call ( ), ⢠GSM high-speed data call ( ), or ⢠packet data (GPRS) connection ( ). There are three different kinds of access poi nts that you can define: MMS access point, browser access point, and Inte rnet access point (IAP). Check with your service provider what kind of an access point is needed f or the service you wish to access. You nee d to set acce ss point settin gs, if you want to, for ex ample, ⢠send and receive multimedia messages, ⢠send and receive e-mail, ⢠browse pages, ⢠download Java⢠applications, ⢠use Image upload, or ⢠use your phone as a modem. See also â Data connection indicators â , p. 10 . GSM data calls A GSM data call enables data transmission rates to a maximum of 14.4 kbps. For availability and subscription to data servic es, contact your network operator or service provider.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 32 Tip! The Settings wizard program included in the PC Suite for Nokia 3660 can help you to configure access point and mailbox settings. You can also copy existi ng settings, for example, from your computer to your phone. See the CD- ROM supplied in the sales package. Minimum settings n eeded to make a data call ⢠To insert a set of basic GSM data call settings, go to Settings â Connection â Access points and select Options â New access point . Fill in the following: Data bearer : GSM data , Dial-up number , Se ssion mode : Permanent , Data call type : Anal ogue , and Maximum data speed : Automatic . High speed data call (High Speed Circuit Switched Data, HSCSD) Glossary: High-speed data enables data transm ission rates to a maximum of 43.2 kbps, which is three times faster than the standard data rates of the GSM network. HSCSD is comparable to the speed of ma ny computer modems that communicate with today's fixed telephone networks. For availability and subscription to high-speed data services, please contact your network operator or service provider. Note: Sending data in HSCSD mode may drai n the phoneâÂÂs battery faster than normal voice or data calls, as the phone may send data more frequently to the network. Packet data (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS) Glossary: Packet dat a, or General Packet Radio Service (GPR S), uses packet data technology where information is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending d ata in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiv ing data. Because GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection set up and fast data transmission speeds. Minimum settings n eeded to make a pack et data connection ⢠You need to subscribe to the GPRS servic e. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your network operator or service provider. â¢G o t o Settings â Co nnecti on â Ac cess points and select Options â New access point . Fill in the following: Data bearer : GPRS an d Access point name : enter the name given to
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 33 you by your service provider. See â Creating an access pointâ , p. 33 for further information. Pricing for packet data and applicatio ns Both the active GPRS connection and the applic ations used over GPRS require a fee, for example, using services, sending and receiving data, and text messages. For more detailed information on fees, contact your networ k operator or service provider. See also â Packet data counter and connection timer â , p. 26 . Options in the Access points list: Edit , New access point , Delete , He lp , and Exit . Creating an access point You may have preset access point settings in your Nokia 3660 mobile phone. Or, you may receive access point settings in a smar t messag e from a service provider. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . If there are no access points defined when you open Access points , you will be asked if you want to create one. If there already are access points define d, to create a new acc ess point, select Options â New access point and select:
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 34 ⢠Use default settings to use the default settings. Ma ke th e need ed chan ges and press Back to save the set tings. ⢠Use existing settings to use existing setting information as the basis for the new access point settings. A list of existing access points is opened. Se lect one and press OK . Access point settings are opened with some fields already filled. Editing an access point When you open Access points, the list of alre ady available access points opens, see Fig. 3 , p. 34 . Scroll to the access point you want to edit, and press . Deleting an access point In the list of access points, scroll to the access po int you want to remove and select Options â Delete . Access points Options when editing access point settings: Change , Advanced settings , Help , and Exit . Here you can see a short explanation for ever y setting that may be needed for different data connections and access points. Note: Start to fill in the settings fro m the top because depending on what data connection you select ( Data bearer ) or whether you need to insert a Gateway IP address , only certain setting fields are available. Note: Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provid er very carefully. ⢠Connection name - Give a descriptive name for the co nnection. ⢠Data bearer - The options are GSM data , High speed GSM , and GPRS . Depending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or wi th a red asterisk . Othe r fi elds can be left empty, unless you have been instructed ot herwise by yo ur service provider. Fig. 3 A l ist of a ccess points using different data connections.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 35 Tip! See als o â Settings needed for multimedia messaging â , p. 77 , â Settings needed for e- mail â , p. 80 , and â Setting up the phone for the browser service â , p. 118 . Note: To be able to use a data connection, the network service provider must support this feature, and if necessar y, activate it for your SIM card. ⢠Access point name (for pa cket dat a only) - The access po int name is needed to establish a connection to the GPRS network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. ⢠Dial-up number (for GSM data and high speed data only) - The modem telephone number of the access point. ⢠User name - Write a user name if required by the service provider. The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service prov ider. The user name is often case-se nsitive. Tip! When you are writing, press to op en the special charac ters table. Press to enter a space. ⢠Prompt password - If you must key in a new password every time you log on to a server, or if you do not want to save your password to the phone, choose Yes . ⢠Password - A password may be n eeded to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The passwo rd is often case-sensitive. When you are writing the password, the characters you enter are shown briefly and then changed to asterisks (*). The easiest way to en ter numbers is to pr ess and select Insert number and then continue entering letters. ⢠Authentication - Normal / Secure. ⢠Gateway IP address - The IP address that the re quired browser gateway uses. ⢠Homepage - Depending on what you are setting up, write either: ⢠the service address, or ⢠the address of the multimedia messaging centre. ⢠Connection security - Choos e whether Transport Layer Security (T LS) is used for the connection. Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. ⢠Session mode - Permanent / Temporary.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 36 Glossary: ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between your phone and your access point. ISDN connections are digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set-up times and faster d ata rates than analogue connections. In order to use an ISDN connection, both your Internet service provider and network operator must support it. ⢠Data call type (for GSM data and high speed data only) - Analogue , ISDN v.110 , or ISDN v.120 defines whether the phone uses an analogue or digital connection. This setting depends on both your GSM network operator and Internet Service Provider (ISP), because some GSM networks do not sup por t certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your ISP. If ISDN connection s are avai lable, they establish connections more quickly than analogue methods. ⢠Maximum data speed (for GSM data and high speed data only) - The options are Automatic / 9600 / 14400 / 19200 / 28800 / 38400 / 43200, depending on what you have chosen in Session mode and Data call type . This option allows you to limit the maximum connection speed when high speed da ta is used. Higher data rate s may cost more, depending on the network service provider. Note: The speeds above r epresent the maximum speed at which your connection will operate. D uring the co nnection, the operating speed may be less, depending on network conditions. Options â Advanced sett ings ⢠Phone IP address - The IP address of your phone. Glossary: DNS - Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates d omain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195 . ⢠Primary name server: - The IP address of the primary DNS server. ⢠Second. name server: - The IP address of the secondary DNS server. Note: If you need to enter the Phone IP address , Primary name server , or Seco nd. name server : , contact your Internet service pr ovider to obtain these addresses. The following settings are shown if you have selected data call and high speed data as the connection type: ⢠Use callback - This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you have a connection withou t paying for the call. Contact your servi ce provider to subscribe to this service. Note: Charge s may apply for certain types of rece ived calls, such as r oaming and high speed data calls. Contact your GSM network operator for more information.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 37 Note: The phone expects the callback call to use the same data call settings that were used in the callback-request ing call. The network must support that type of call in both di rect ions, to and from the phone. ⢠Callback type - The options are Use server no. / Use other no. Ask your service provider for the correct setting to use; it will depend on the service providerâÂÂs configuration. Glossary: PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) - a common networking software protocol that enables any computer with a modem and a phone li ne to connect directly to the Internet. ⢠Callback number - Key in your phoneâÂÂs data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually, this number is the da ta call phone number of your phone. ⢠Use PPP compression - When set to Yes , this option speeds up the data transfer, if supported by the remote PPP server. If you have problems with establishing a connection, try setting this to No . Contact y our service provider for guidance. ⢠Use login script - The options are Yes / No . ⢠Login script - Insert the login script. ⢠Modem initialisation (Modem initialisation string)- Controls your phone using modem AT commands. If required, enter characters specified by your GSM network service provider or Internet service provider. GPRS Go to Settings â Connection â GPRS . The GPRS settings affect all access po ints using a packet data connection. GPRS connection - If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the phone registers to the GPRS network and sending text messages will be done via GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, is quicker. If you select When needed , the phone will us e a packet data connection only if you s tart an application or action that needs it. The GPRS connection is closed after it is not used by any application. Note: If there is no GPRS coverage and yo u have chosen When available , the phone will periodically try to establish a packet data connection.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 38 Access point - The access point name is needed when you want to use your phone as a packet data modem to your comput er. For mo re information on modem connections, see p. 138 . Data call Go to Settings â Connection â Data call . The Data call settings affect all access points using a data call and high speed data call. Online time - If there are no actions the data call is dropped automatically after a time- out period. The options are User defined , in which case you enter a time, or Unlimited . Date and time Tip! See also the Language settings, p. 27 . ⢠The date and time settings allow you to defi ne the date and time used in your phone, as well as change the date and time format and separators. Choose Clock type â Analogue or Digital to change the clock shown in standby mode. Choose Auto time update if you want the mobile phone network to update time, date, and time zone information to your phone (network service). Note: For the Auto time update setting to take effect, the phone needs to be restarted. Security Phone and SIM Explanations for the different secu rity codes that may be needed: ⢠PIN code (4 to 8 digits) - The PIN (Personal Identifica tion Number) code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 39 After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entr ies, the PIN code is blocked. If the PIN code is blocked, you need to unblock the PIN code before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about the PUK code. ⢠PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) - The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is required to access some functions, such as call cost count ers. ⢠Lock code (5 digits) - The lock code can be used to lock the phone and keypad to avoid unauthorised use. Note: The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unautho rised use of your phone, change the lock code . Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. ⢠PUK and PUK2 codes (8 digits) - The PUK (Personal Unblocki ng Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied w ith th e SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone for the codes. You can change the following codes: lock co de, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . Note: Avoid using access codes similar to the e mergency numbers, such as 112, to prevent accidental dial ling of the emergency number. PIN code request - Wh en the PIN code request is acti ve, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Note that deac tivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code / PIN2 code / Lock code - Open this setting if you want to change the code. Tip! To lock the phone man ually, press . A list of commands opens. Se lect Lock phone . Autolock period - You can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. Key in a number for the time-out in minutes or select None to turn off the autolock period. ⢠To unlock the phone, key in the lock code.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 40 Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Lock if SIM changed - Select Yes if you want the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into yo ur phone. The phone ma intains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. To view the list of Fixed dialling numbers, go to Menu â SIMâ Fixed dialling . Fixed dialling - You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. When this function is active, you can only call those phone numbe rs that are included in the fixed dialling list or which begin with the same digi t(s) as a phone number on the list. Options in the Fixed dialling view: Open , Call , New contact , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Help , and Exit . Note: When Fixed Dialling is set on, calls may be p ossible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). ⢠To add new numbers to the F ixed dialling list, select Options â New contact or Add from Contacts . Closed user group (network service) - You can specif y a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. For more informatio n, contact your network operator or service provider. Select: Default to activate the default group agreed on with the network operator, On if you want to use another group (you need to know the group index number), or Off . Note: When calls are limited to Closed User Groups, calls may be poss ible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Confirm SIM services (network service) - To set the ph one to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 41 Certif. management Options in the certificate management main view: Certificate details , Del ete , Trust settings , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . In the Certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phon e. Press to see a list of us er certificates, if available. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to veri fy the origin of browser pages and installed software. Ho wever, they can only be trusted if the origin of the cert ificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates are needed if you: ⢠want to connect to an online bank or anothe r site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information, or Glossary: Authority certificates are used by some services, such as banking services, for checking signatures or server certificates or other authority certificates. ⢠want to mini mise the risk o f viruses or ot her malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when dow nloading and installing software. Important: Note, however , that even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and softwa re installation cons iderably s maller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer an y protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correc t, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Glossary: User certificat es are issued to users by a Certifying Authority. Viewing certificate details - checking authenti city You can only be sure of the correct identity of a browser gateway or a server when the signature and the period of validity of a browse r gateway or server ce rtificate have been checked. You will be notified on the phoneâÂÂs display: ⢠if the identity of the browser serv er or gateway is not authentic or ⢠if you do not have the correct security certificat e in your phone.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 42 To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate and select Option s â Cert ificate details . When you open certificate details, Certificat e management checks the validity of the certificate and one of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not trusted - You have not set any a pplicat ion to use the certificate. For more information, see the next section â Changing the trust settings of an authority certificate â . ⢠Expired certificate - The period of v alidity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet - The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted - T he certificate cannot be used . Contact the certificate issuer. Important: Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificat e or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certificate sh ould be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. Changing t he trust se ttings of an authority certificate ⢠Scroll to an authority certificate and select Options â Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that ca n use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Services / Yes - the certificate is able to certify sites. Application manager / Yes - the certificate is able to certify the origin of new software. Internet / Yes - the certificate is able to ce rtify e-mail and imag ing servers. Important: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Settings 43 Call barring (network service) Call barring allows you t o restrict the making and receiving of calls with your phone. For this function, you need the barring passwo rd, which you can obtain from your ser v ice provider. 1 Scroll to one of the barring options. 2 Select Options â Activate to request the network to set call restriction on, Cancel to set the selected call restrict ion off, or Check status to check if the calls ar e barred or not. ⢠Select Options â Edit barrings passw. to change the barring password. ⢠Select Options â Cancel all barrings to cancel all active call barrings. Note: When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Note: Call barring affects all ca lls , including data calls. Note: You cannot have barring of incoming calls and call diverting or fixed dialling active at the same time. See â Settings for call diverting â , p. 21 or âÂÂFixed diallingâÂÂ, p. 40 . Network Network selection ⢠Choose Automatic to s et the phone to automatically search for and select one of the cellular network s available in your area, or
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Settings 44 Glossary: Roaming agreement - An agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. ⢠Choose Manual , if you want to select the desi red network manually from a list of networks. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to select a network again. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display ⢠Select On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellula r network based on Micro Cellular Network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Accessory settings Indicators shown in standby mode: - a headset is connected. - a loopset is connected. Scroll to an accessory folder and open the settings: ⢠Select Default profile to select the profile you want to be activated each time when you connect a certain accessory to your phone. See â Profiles â , p. 99 . ⢠Select Automatic answer to set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after five seconds time. If the Incoming call alert is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer cannot be in us e. Note: If you are usi ng a loopset, you need to activate it separately. Open the Loopset folder and select Use loopset â Yes . If you have activated a loopset, the headset will use the same settings as the loopset.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 45 4. Contacts To open Contacts, press in standby mode or go to Menu â Contacts . In Contacts, you can store and manage cont act information, such as names, phone numbers, and addresses. See Fig. 1 , p. 45 . Contacts use shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . You can also add a personal ringing tone, vo ice tag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can create cont act groups, which allo w you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. Glossary: Voice tags can be any spoken words, for example, a personâÂÂs first name. Voice tags allow you to make phone ca lls simply by saying the word aloud. Creating contact cards 1 Open Contacts and select Options â New contact . An empty contact card opens. 2 Fill in the fields you want and press Done . The contact card is saved in the phone memory and closed, after which you can see it in the Contacts directory. Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SI M card to your phone, go to Menu â SIM â SIM directory . Se lect the name(s) you want to copy and select Options â Copy to Contacts . ⢠If you want to copy a phone, fax, or pa ger number from Contacts to your SIM card, go to Contacts, open a contact card, scroll to the number, and select Options â Copy to SIM direct. Fig. 1 The contacts directory.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 46 Editing contact cards Options in the Contacts directory: Open , Call, Create message , New contact , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/Unmark , Send , Contacts info , Help , and Exit . 1 In the Contacts directory, scroll to the contac t card you want to edit and press to open it. 2 To change the information on the card, select Options â Edit. 3 To save yo ur change s and to r eturn to th e contact card view, p ress Done . Deleting contact cards ⢠In the Contacts directory, scroll to the contact card you want to delete and selec t Options â Delete . To delete many contact cards 1 Mark the cards to be deleted. Scroll to a contact you want to delete and select Options â Mark . A check mark is placed next to the contact card. Options when editing a contact card: Add thumbnail / Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . 2 When you have marked all the cont acts you want to delete, select Options â Delete . Tip! You can also ma rk many items if you press and h old and simultaneously press . See also â Actions common to all applications â , p. 13 . Adding and removing contact card fields 1 Open a contact card and selec t Options â Edit . 2 To add an extra field, select Options â Add detail. To delete a field you do not need, select Options â Delete detail . To rename a contact card field label, select Options â Edit label . Inserting a picture to a contact card There are two different types of pictur es you can add to a contact card. See â Camera and Images â , p. 53 for more information on how to take and store pictures.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 47 ⢠To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open a contact card, select Options â Edit and then select Options â Add thumbnail . See Fig. 2 , p. 47. The thumbnail image is also shown when the contact is calling you. Note: After you attach a thumbnai l image to a contac t card, you can selec t Add thumbnail to replace the image with a different thumbnail or Remove thumbnail to remove the thumbnail from the contact card. ⢠To add an image to a contact card, open a contact card, an d press to open the Image view ( ). To attach an image, select Options â Add image . Viewing a contact card Contact information view ( ) shows all inform ation inserted in the contact card. Press to open the Image view ( ). Note: Only fields that have info rmation ar e displayed in the contact information view. Select Options â Edit if you want to see all fiel ds and add more data to the contact. Options when viewing a contact card when the selection is on a phone number: Call , Create message , Edit , Delete , Default s , Add voice tag / Voice tags , Assign speed dial / Remove speed dial , Ringing tone , Copy to SIM direct. , Send , Help , and Ex it . Assigning default numbers and addresses If a contact has several phone numbers or e- mail addresses, to speed up c alling and sending messages, you can define certain num bers and addresses to be used as the default. ⢠Open a contact card and select Options â Defaults . A pop-up window opens, listing the different options. Example: Scroll to Phone number and press Assign . A list of phone numbers in the selected co ntact card is shown. Scroll to the one you want to have as the default and press . When you return back to the contact card view, you can see the default number underlined. See Fig. 2 , p. 47 . Fig. 2 The contact information view
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 48 Voice dialling You can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact c ard. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialling, no te that: ⢠Voice tags are not language dependent. They are dependent on the speaker 's voice. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to back ground nois e. Record them and mak e calls in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Example: You can use a personâÂÂs name for a voice tag, for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs mobileâÂÂ. Note: You must say the name exactly as you sa id it when you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for example, a noisy enviro nment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voic e dialling in all circumstances. Adding a voice tag to a phone number Note: Voice tags can only be added to ph one numbers stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory. See â Copying contacts between the SIM card and phone memory â , p. 45 . 1 In the Contacts directory, scroll to the co ntact to which you want to add a voice tag and press to open the contact card. 2 Scroll to the number to which you want to add the voice tag and select Optio ns â Add voice tag . Note: You can have only one voice tag per contact card. 3 The text Press Start, then speak a fter tone is displayed. Tip! To view a list of voice tags you have defined, select Options â Contacts info â Voice tags in the Contacts directory. When recording, hold the phone at a short distance away from your mouth. After the starting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voice tag. ⢠Press Start to record a voice tag. The phone so unds a starting tone and the note Speak no w is displayed. 4 After recording, the phone plays the recorded tag and the note Playing voice tag is displayed. If you do not want to save the reco rding, pres s Quit .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 49 5 When the voice tag has been su ccessfully saved, the note Voice tag saved is displayed and a beep sounds. A symbol can be seen next to the number in the contact card. Note: Your phone may have 25 phone num bers to which voice tags are attached. If the memory becomes full, delete some of the voice tags. Making a call by saying a voice tag Note: You must say the voice tag exactly as you said it when you recorded it. 1 In standby mode, press and hold . A short tone is played and the no te Speak now is displayed. 2 When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudspeak er is in use. Hold the phone at a short distance away from yo ur mouth and face and say the voice tag clearly. 3 The phone plays the original voice tag, di splays the name and number, and after 1 .5 seconds dials the number of the recognised voice tag. ⢠If the phone plays the wrong voice ta g or to retry voice dialling, press Retry . Note: When an application using a data call or GPRS connection is sending or receiving data, you cannot make a call by us ing voic e dialling. To make a call by using a voice tag, end all active data connections. Replaying, erasing, or changing a voice tag To replay, erase, or change a voice tag, ope n a contact card and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indicated by ) and select Options â Voice tags â then either ⢠Playback - to listen to the voice tag again, or ⢠Delete - to erase the voice tag, or ⢠Change - to record a new voice tag instead of the old one. Press Start to record. Assigning speed dialling keys Speed dialling is a quick way to call freque ntly used numbers. You can assign speed dialling keys to eight phone numbers. Number 1 is reserved for the voice mailbox.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 50 1 Open the contact card for which you want a speed dialling key and select Options â Assign spee d dial . The speed dialling grid opens, showing you the numbers from 1 -9 . See Fig. 3 , p. 50 . 2 Scroll to a number and press Assign . When you return to the contact information view, you can see the speed dial icon next to the nu mb er. See Fig. 2 , p. 47 . ⢠To call the contact by speed dialling, go to standby mode and press the speed dialling key and . Adding a ringing tone for a contact card or group You can set a ringing ton e for each contact ca rd and group. When that contact or group member calls you, the phone plays the chos en ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognises it). 1 Press to open a contact card or go to th e Groups list and select a contact g roup. 2 Select Options â Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Use the scroll key to select the ringing tone you wish to use for the contact or group and press Select . ⢠To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Note: For an individual contact, the phone will always use the ringing tone that was assigned last. S o, if you first change a group ringing tone and then the ringing tone of a single contact that belongs to that group, the ringing tone of the single contact will be used when the contact calls you the next time. Fig. 3 The speed dialling grid
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Contacts 51 Sending contact information Glossary: When you send or receive contact information, the term âÂÂbusiness cardâ is used. A business card is a contact card in a format suitable to be sent in a text message, usually in âÂÂvCardâ format. 1 In the Contacts directory, scroll to the card you want to send. 2 Select Options â Send then select the meth od, the choices are: Via text message , Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place), via Infrared , or via Bluetooth . The contact card you want to send has now become a âÂÂbusiness cardâÂÂ. For further informa tion, see the â Messaging â chapter, â Sending and receiving data via infrared â , p. 137 , and â Sending data via Bluetoothâ , p. 133 . ⢠You can add received business cards to your Contacts directory. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 for further information. Managing contact groups Options in the Groups list view: Open , Ne w group , Delet e , Rename , Ri nging tone , Contacts info , He lp , and Exit . You can create contact groups, which can, for example, be used as distribution lists for sending text messages and e-mail. See also p. 50 for how to add a ringing tone for a group. Creating contact groups 1 In the Contacts directory, pr ess to open the Groups list. 2 Select Options â New group . See Fig. 4 , p. 52 . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group and press OK . Adding members to a group 1 In the Contacts directory, sc roll to the cont act you want to add to a group and select Options â Add to gr oup: . A list of available groups opens. 2 Scroll to the group to w hich you want to add the contact and press .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Contacts 52 Adding multiple members at a time 1 In the Groups list, ope n a group and select Options â Add members. 2 Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. Re peat this action on all the contacts you want to add and press OK to add them to the selected group. Removing members from a group 1 Go to the Groups list, scroll to the group you want to modify , and press . 2 Scroll to the contact you want to remove and select Options â Remove from group. 3 Press Yes to remove the contact from the group. Importing data from other Nokia phones You can move calendar, contacts and to-do da ta from many different Nokia phones to your Nokia 3660 using the PC Suite for Nokia 3 660 Data Import applica tion. Instructions for using the application can be found in the PC Suite online help on the CD-ROM. Fig. 4 Creating a contact group.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 53 5. Camera and Images Press Camera in standby mode or go to Menu â Camera . With the camera you can take pictures of people or events while on the move. The pictures are automatica lly saved in the Images applicat ion, where you can rename them and organise them in folders. You can also se nd photos to your friends in a multimedia message, as an e-mail a ttachment, or v ia a Bluetooth or infrared connect ion. The camera produces JPEG pictures. Options before taking a picture: Capture , Go to Images , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Glossary: JPEG is a standardised image compression format. JPEG files can be viewed with the most common image viewers, image editors, and Internet browsers. You can recognise thes e files by their JPG extension. Taking pictures Note: Obey all local laws governing the tak ing of pictures. Do not use this feature illegally. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. 1 Press Camera in standby mode. The Camera application opens and you can see the view to be captured. In Fig. 1 , p. 53 , you can see the viewfinder and the cropping lines, which show you the image area to be captured. You can also see the image counter, which shows you how many images, depending on the selected im age quality, fit in the memory of your phone. 2 To take a picture, press . Fig. 1 Finding a view to capture.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 54 Note: Do not move the phone before the Ca mera application st arts to save the photo. The photos are saved automa tically in the Images application. After the image has be en saved: ⢠If you do not want to save the photo in the Images application, select Options â Delete . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . Options after a picture has been taken: New image , Delete , Send, Rename image , Go to Images , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠You can insert an image into a contact card. See â Inserting a picture to a contact card â , p. 46 . Note: Camera goes into battery saving mode if there have been no key presses within a minute. To continue taking pictures, press . Settings In the Camera application settings, you can adjust the image qua lity setting and change the default image name. Example: If you set âÂÂBeachâ as the default image name, Camera will name all the pictures you take âÂÂBeachâÂÂ, âÂÂBeach(01)âÂÂ, âÂÂBeach(02)âÂÂ, and so on, until you change the setting again. 1 Select Options â Settings. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change: ⢠Image quality - High , Normal , and Basic . The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. See also â Images and memory consumption â , p. 56 . ⢠Default image name - By default, Camera name s photos in the format â Image .jpgâÂÂ. Default image name allows you to set a name for the pictures taken. See the example in the side of the page. ⢠Memory in use - Select whether you want to store your images in the phone memory or the memory card, if you use one.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 55 Camera mode affects image size a nd orientation Tip! Try out the different Camera modes to see how they affect the picture taken. With the different Camera modes, you can affe ct the size and orientation of the picture to be taken. See Fig. 2 , p. 55 . When you are taking a picture, press or to change between the different modes. Choose: ⢠Standard when you want to take normal landscape pictures, ⢠Portrait when you want to take a smaller ico n -sized, vertical picture, which can be added to a contact card, or ⢠Night when the lighting is dim and the Came ra needs a longer exposure time for the picture to be of good quality. Note that , in dim conditions, any movement while taking a picture ma y cause it to get blurred. The image size and orientation is t he same for Sta ndard and Night . Glossary: Resoluti on - A measure for the sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolution refers to the number of dots (pixels) in an image or a display. The more pixels there are, the more detailed the picture is. Resolution is usually measured in pixels, for example, 640x480=300 kilopixels (kpix)=0.3 megapixels (Mpix). Fig. 2 Standard, Portrait, and Night modes ⢠When you are taking a picture in Standard or Night mode, the viewfinder resolution is 160x120 pixels and 80x96 for Portrait mode. ⢠The images taken in Standard or Night mo de are sa ved in 640x480 pixel (VGA) format and those taken in Portrait mode are saved in 80x96 pixel format.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 56 ⢠When you are viewing images, they are scal ed to fit the display, which has 176x208 pixels. This means that Standard and Nigh t mode pictures will appear more detailed when viewed on a higher resolution screen, for example, a computer or when zoomed in Images. Images and memory consump tion Your phone has approxima tely 3 MB (megab ytes) of free memory for images, contact information, calendar, messages, and so on. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Portrait images (always taken in High qu ality) are so small that they ta ke up very little memory . Images taken using the High quality setting and thos e taken in Night mode take up the most memory. If 1 M B o f m e m o r y is u s e d fo r i m a g e s o n l y , it would fit approximately 22 Normal quality images taken in Standard mode. In the tabl e b elow, you can see approximately how many images would fit in 1 MB of memory. Tip! By using a memory card with you r phone you can increase the number of images you can store. Image quality Image type Basic Normal High Standard 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18 Portrait --> 3 0 0
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 57 Images - Storing pictures Go to Menu â Images . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Images allows you to view, organise, delete, an d send photos and pictures stored in your phone. In Images you can organise images: Options in Images: Open , Send , Image uploader , Delet e , Move to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Receive via infrared (only from a digital camera that supports the IrTran-P protocol, otherwise use the â Infrared connection â , see p. 136 ), View details , Add to Favouri tes , Update thumbnails , Help , and Exit . ⢠taken with the camera, ⢠sent to your Inb ox in a multimedia or a pi cture message, as an e-mail attachment, via an infrared or Bluetooth connection. After receiving the image in Inbox, you need to save it in Images. In Fig. 3 , p. 58 , you can see the Images main view, a lis t of photos and folders. In the list you can see: ⢠the date and time a photo or an image was taken or sav ed, ⢠a small thumbnail picture, a preview of the image, ⢠the number of items inside a folder , and ⢠a tab showing whether the photos or folder s are located in the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if you use one. Viewing images Note: When you open Image s and you use a memory card, the starting tab is determined by which memory is selected as the Memory in use . 1 Press or to move from one memory tab to another. 2 To browse the images, press and .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 58 Options when viewing an image: Send , Rotate , Zoom in , Zoom out , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View details , Add to Favourites , Help , and Exit . 3 Press , to open an image. When the image is open, you can see the name of the image and the number of im ages in th e fold er on the top of the display. When you are viewing an image, pressing or takes you to the next or previous picture in the current folder. You can view animated GIF files in the same way as other images. Animations are played only once. When an animation stops, you will see a fixed image. To view the animation again, you must close it and then reopen it. Zooming 1 Select Options â Zoom in or Zoom out . You can see the zooming ratio at the top of the display, see Fig. 4 , p. 59 . See also section â Keyboard shortcutsâ later in this chapter. 2 Press Back to return to the initial view. Note: The zoom ratio is not stored permanently. Note: You cannot zoom in on GIF anim ations while they are playing. Full screen When you select Options â Full screen , the panes around the picture are removed so that you can see more of the image. Press to go back to the initial view. Moving the focus When you are zooming or viewing an image in full screen mode, use the scroll key to move the focus to the left, right, up, or down, so that y ou can take a closer look at one part of the picture, for example, its upper right corner, as in Fig. 4 , p. 59 . Rotating Select Options â Rotateâ Left to rotate an image 90 degrees anticlockwise or Right to rotate the image clockwise. The rotati on status is not stor ed permanent ly. Fig. 3 The Images main view
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Camera and Images 59 Keyboard shortcuts ⢠Rotate: - anticlockwise, - clockwi se ⢠Scroll: - up, - down, - left, - right ⢠- zoom in, - zoom out, press and hold to return to the normal view. ⢠- change between full screen and normal view. Image details view ⢠To view the detailed information about an image, scroll to the image and select Options â View details . A list of image information appears: Format - JPEG , GIF , PNG , TIFF, MBM, BMP , WBMP , OT A , WMF , Unsupported , or Unknown . Date and Time - when the image was created or saved, Resolutn. - the size of the image in pixels, see the glossary explanation, p. 55 , Size - in bytes or kilobytes (kb), Colour - True colour , 65536 colours , 4096 colours , 256 colours , 16 colours , Greyscale , or Black/white . Arranging images and folders ⢠To remove an image or folder, scroll to it and select Options â Delete . ⢠To rename an image or a fold er, scroll to th e image or folder you want to rename and select Op tions â Rename . Write the new name and press . See â Actions common to all applications â , p. 13 for further information on how to create folders and mark and mo ve items to folders . Fig. 4 Zooming in and moving the focus
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Camera and Images 60 Sending images Tip! You can send several images a t a time via infrared or Bluetooth. To send several ima ges at a time you need to mark them first. To mark several images a t a time use the Options â Mark/Un mark commands or press and hold and at the same time press or . As the selection moves, a check mark is placed next to the images. To end the selection, stop the scroll key and then release . You can send photos or images via different messaging services. 1 Scroll to the image you want to send and select Options â Send . 2 Then select the method, the choices are Via multimedia , Via e-mail , Via infrared , and Via Bluetooth . ⢠If you select to send the image in an e-mail or a multimedia message, an edit or opens. Press to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts direc tory or write the phone number or e-mail addr ess of the recipient in the To : field. Add text or sound and select Options â Send . For more information, see â Creating and sending new messag es â , p. 74 . ⢠If you want to send the image via infrared or Bluetooth, see â Sending data via Bluetooth â , p. 133 , and â Sending and receiv ing data via infraredâ , p. 137 for more information. Picture messages folder Options in the Picture messages folder: Open , Send , Delete , Mark/Unmark , Rename , View details , Help , and Exit . In the Picture messages folder, you can find gra phics sent to you in picture messages. If you want to save a graphic you ha ve received in a picture message, go to Messagin g â Inbox , open the m essage, a nd select Options â Save picture . Viewing pictures 1 Scroll to the picture you want to view and press . The picture opens. Press to view the next picture in the folder. 2 Press Back to return to the Pictures main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Video recorder 61 6. Video recorder Go to Menu â Video recorder . Note: Obey all local laws gover ning the taking of vide os. Do not use this feature illegally. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the Video recorder. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. With the Video recorder you can record video clips, and play video clips stored on your phone or on a memory card. Also, the Video recorder is integrated with th e messaging features allowing you to easily send created clips. Video recorder uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Recording a video clip You can record video clips up to 95 kB in si ze, or approximately 10 seconds in duration. Recorded video clips are in the .3gp format. Glossary: 3GPP file format (.3gp) is the standard video file format for Multimedia Messaging. 1 To begin recording open the Video recorder and select Options â Record and you can see the view to record. See Fig. 1 , p. 61 . 2 To start recording press . The progress bar on the bottom of the sc r een shows you how much recording time remains. To pause recording at any time press . To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, press . Fig. 1 Recording a video clip
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Video recorder 62 The video clip is saved to either the phoneâ s memory or the memory card, depending on the setting of your Memory in use . See â Setting up your Video recorder â , p. 62 . Options in video clip view of Video recorder: Play , Record , Send , Delete , Rename , Settings , About product , Help , and Exit . Watching a video clip To watch a video clip from the Video recorder video clip list: 1 Open the Video recorder. 2 Scroll to a video clip and select Options â Play . See Fig. 2 , p. 62 . Once a video clip is playing, you have s imila r options available to you as when pl aying a video clip in â RealOne Player⢠â . See â RealOne Playerâ¢â , p. 63 . Sending video clips You can send video clips by using the Send option from your video clip list. 1 Scroll to the video clip you want to send and select Options â Send . 2 Select one of the four ways you have of sending your video clip, Via multimedia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Setting up your Video recorder You can define whether you stor e your vide o clips in the phoneâÂÂs memory or on the memory card, if you have on e, and how to name your video clips. Select Options â Settings and you have: ⢠Memory in use - Choose between Phone memory and Memory card. ⢠Default video name - Define the default name of your video clips. Example: If you set âÂÂHolidayâ as the default video clip name, Video recorder will name all the video clips y ou take âÂÂHoliday âÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(01)âÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(02)âÂÂ, and so on, until you change the setting again. Fig. 2 Video clip list
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. RealOne Player⢠63 7. RealOne Player⢠Go to Menu â RealOne Player . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. With the RealOne Player⢠you can play media files stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory or on a memory card, or play music and video file s and stream live content from the Internet. Glossary: Media files are video, music or audi o clips which you can play on a media player like the RealOne Player . Files wi th extensio ns .3gp, .amr, . mp4, .rm, .ram, .ra and .rv. are supported by the RealOne Player. RealOne Player does not necessarily support all the variations of all file formats supported. For example, RealOne Player will attempt to open all .mp4 files. However, some .mp4 files may incl ude content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and therefore is not supported by the Nokia 3660 phon e. In this case, the operation might fail and result in partial playba ck or in an error me ssage. RealOne Player uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Options: See adjacent list. The Options menu shows different availability options as follows: ⢠When the list has no file s, links, or folders: Open , New folder, Settings , About product, Help and Exit . ⢠When the selected item is a local file: Play , Open, Rename (if no items are m arked), Delete , New folder , Move to folder , Mark/U nmark , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , About product , Help and Exit . ⢠When the selected item is a network link: Play (if no items are marked), Open , Rename , Edit link , Delete , New folder , Move to folder , Mark/Unmark , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , About product , Hel p and Exit .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. RealOne Player⢠64 ⢠When a folder is highlighted: Open folder (if no items are marked), Open , Rename (if no items are marked), Delete , New folder, Mark/Unmark, Settings, About product, Help and Exit . ⢠When many items are selected: Open , Delete, New folder , Move t o folder , Mark /Unmark , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , About product , Help and Exit . Media Guide From your RealOne Player you can open a br owser page containing a Media Guide with links to streaming media sites and files. See â Streaming from the Internet â , p. 65 . Playing media files You can play any music or video file from the list shown when you start the RealOne Player, or directly from the Internet. Fig. 2 Playing a local media file ⢠To play a media file stored in your phoneâÂÂs memory or memory card, open RealOne Player, scroll to the file and select Options â Play . See Fig. 1 , p. 64 , and Fig. 2 , p. 64 . Fig. 1 Mus ic and video clip list
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. RealOne Player⢠65 Glossary: Streaming is playing sound or video in real time as it is downloaded from the Internet, as opposed to storing it in a local file first. ⢠To play a media file directly from the Internet: 1 Select Options â Open â URL address . 2 Enter the URL of the site you want to play or stream content from. Note: You cannot connect to a site u n less yo u have configured a n Access Point, see Default Access Point setting, p. 67 . Many service providers will require y ou to use an Internet Access Point (IAP) for your Default Access Point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access po int. Contact y our service provider for advice and availability. Note: In the RealOne Player, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. You cannot open an http:// URL address, however RealOne Player will recognise an http link to a .ram file since a .ram file is a text file containi ng an rtsp link . Streaming from the Internet ⢠To stream live content fr om the Internet (network service ) , firstly configure your Default Access Po int, see No te, p. 65 . Then: 1 Open RealOne Player and select Options â Open â Guide . Open the Media Guide to find a link to a streaming site which interests you. 2 Select the link. You are prompted to disconnect the WAP access point. ⢠If you have configured an Internet Access Point (IAP) as your Default Access Point in RealOne Player (with the agreem ent of your service provider), accept the prompt. ⢠If you have configured a WAP access point a s your Default Access Point in RealOne Player (with the agreement of your service provider), decline the prompt. Your streaming session should now begin. Before your media file or s tream begins play ing, your phone will connect to the site and load the file. See Fig. 3 , p. 66 . For further information about setting up your Nokia 3660 phone for str eaming with RealOne Player, please visit http://www.nokia.com/phones/3660/ support .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. RealOne Player⢠66 Glossary: Buffering is the temporary storage of a part of your streaming content into the phoneâÂÂs memory before itâÂÂs played. Fig. 3 Streaming a media file from the In ternet; connecting, buffering then playing Volume control ⢠To increase the volume press , or to decrease the volume press . ⢠To mute the sound press and hold until the indicator is displayed. ⢠To turn on the sound press and hold until you see the indicator, see Fig 2 , p. 64 . Sending media files You can send media files by usin g the Send option from your video clip list. 1 Scroll to the file you want to send and select Options â Send . 2 Select one of the four ways you have of sending your file, via Via infrared , Via Bluetooth , Via multimedia or Via e-mail .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. RealOne Player⢠67 Changing the settings Tip! When you select one of the settings a tab view is opened. Press or to move between the different setting tabs. The following icons indicate which setting you are in: for Video for Playback for Network , and for Proxy . To change the Video settings, select Options â Settings â Video to open the following list of settings: ⢠Video quality - Choose Sharp images to have better picture quality, but slower framerate, or High framerate for faster framerate, but lower picture quality. ⢠Automatic scaling - Choose On to have automatic resizing of the video image. To change the Playback settings, select Options â Set tings â Playback to open the following setting: ⢠Repeat - Choose On to have the playing video or audi o file restart automatically once it has finished. To change the Network settings, select Options â Settings â Network to open the following list of settings: ⢠Default Access Point - As defined in Connection settings , see â Access po ints â , p. 34 . See also the guidance in Step 2, p. 65 . ⢠Bandwidth - Choose Auto matic to have the best delivery rate available. ⢠Maximum bandwidth - Choose the maximum ban d wi dth for streaming content. ⢠Connection time-out - Open the slider view to change the waiting time for the initial server connection on a streaming session. ⢠Server time-out - Open the slider view to change the time allowed for no response from the server. ⢠Highest Port and Lowest Port - Enter the port numbers for streaming. I f you are not sure of the numbers, contact your service provider. To change the Proxy settings, select Options â Settings â Proxy to open the following list of settings: ⢠Use Proxy / Host address / Port - Choose whether a proxy is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 68 8. Messaging Go to Menu â Messaging . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Messaging folder. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . In Messaging you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organise: ⢠text messages, Options in the Messaging main view: Create message , Connect (s hown if you have defined settings for the mailbox), or Disconnect (shown if there is an active connection to mailbox), SIM messages , Cell broadcast , Service commands , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠multimedia messages, ⢠e-mail messages, and ⢠smart messages, special text messages containing data. In addition to these, you can receive messages and data via an infrared or Bluetooth connection, receive service messages, cell broadcast messages as well as send service commands. Text and multimedia messages use shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . When you open Messaging, you can see the Create message function and a list of default folders: Inbox - contains received messages excep t e-mail and cell broa dcast messages. E- mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . You can read cell broadcast messa ges by selecting Options â Cell broadcast. My folders - for organising your messages into folders. Tip! Organise your messages by adding new folders under My folders. Mailbox - When you open this folder, you can either connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. See p. 86 for further info rmation on onlin e and offline modes. After you have defined settings for a new mailbox, the name given to that mailbox w ill replace Mailbox in the main view. See â Settings for e-mail â , p. 96 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 69 Drafts - stores draft messages that have not been sent . Outbox - is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Sent - stores the last 15 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see â Settings for the Other folder â , p. 98 . Reports - you can request the ne twork to send you a delivery report of the text messages, smart messages, an d multimedia messages you have sent. To turn on delivery report reception, select Options â Settings â Text message or Multimedia message , scroll to Receive report , and select Yes . Tip! When you have opened one of the default folders, for example, Sent , you can easily move between the folders: by pressing to open the next folder ( Outbox ), or by pressing to open the previous folder ( Drafts ). Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multim edia message that has been sen t to an e-mail address might not be possible. Note: Before you can create a multimedia me ssage, write an e-mail, or connect to your remote mailbox, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See â Settings needed for e-mail â , p. 80 and â Settings needed for multimedia messaging â , p. 77 . Messaging - General information The message status is always ei ther draft, sent, or received. Messages can be saved to the Drafts folder before they are sent. Messages are temporarily placed to Outbox to wait for sending. After a message has been sent, you can find a copy of the message in the Sent folder. Received and sent messages are in read-only state until you select Reply or Forward , which copies the message to an editor . Note that you cannot forward e-mail messages you yourself have sent. Note: Messages or data that have been sent via an infrared or Bluetooth connection are not saved in the Draft o r Sent folders.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 70 Opening a received message ⢠When you r eceive a mess age, and the note 1 new me ssage is shown in standby mode. Press Show to open the message. ⢠If you have more than one new message, pr ess Show to open the Inbox to see the message headings. To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it and press . Adding a recipient to a message When you create a message, th ere are several ways to add a recipient: ⢠add recipients from the Contacts directory. To open the Contacts directory, p ress or in the To: or Cc: fields, or select Options â Add recipient . Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. Press OK to return to the message. The reci pients are listed in the To: field and automatically separated with a semicolon ( ; ). Example: 44 123 456 ; 050 456 876 ⢠write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To: field, or ⢠copy the recipient information from anothe r application and then paste it to the To: field. See â Copying text â , p. 73 . Press to delete a recipient to the left of the cursor. Note: If you write many phone numbers or e-mail addresses in the To: field, you must remember to add a semicolon ( ; ) between each item to separate them from each other. When you retrieve recipien ts from the Contacts direct ory, the semicolon is added automatically. Sending options To change how a messa ge is sent, select Option s â Send ing options when you are editing a message. When you save the message, its sending settings are also saved.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 71 Writing text Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly when writing text. You can key in text in two different ways, us ing the method traditionally used in mobile phones or another method called predictive text input. Using traditional text input The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( - ), repeatedly until the desired character appears. Note, that there are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. Icons: and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the next word is written in upper case, and all other letters will automatically be written in lower case. indicat es number mode. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same ke y as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and then key in the letter. ⢠If you make a mistake, press to remove a character. Press and hold to clear more than one ch aracter. ⢠The most common punctuat ion marks are available und er . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press to open a list of special charac te rs. Use the scroll key to move through the list and press Select to select a character . ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between upper and lower case, press . Using predictive text input To activate predictive text input, press and select Dictionary on . This will activate predictive text input for all editors in the phone. The indicator is shown at the top of the display.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 72 1 Write the desired word by pressing the keys - . Press each key only once for one letter. The word changes after every key press. Note: Do not pay attention to what appears on the display. The word match is evolving, wait until you have keyed in the whole word before you check th e result. For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when En glish dictionary is selected , press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a. As you can see in Fig. 1 , p. 72 , the word suggestion changes after each key press. 2 When you have finished the word, ch eck that it is correct. ⢠If the word is correct, you can confirm it by pressing or by pressing to insert a space. The underlining disappears and you can begin to write a new word. ⢠If the word is not correct, you have the following options: ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matchi ng words th e dictionary has found one by one. ⢠Press and select Dictionary â Matches to view a list of matching words. Scroll to the word you want to use and press to select it. ⢠If the ? character is shown after the word, t he word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, press Spell , key in the word (max. 32 letters) using traditional text i nput, and press OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes fu ll, a new word replaces the oldest added word. ⢠To remove the ? and clear characters one by one from the word, press . Tips on using predictive text input ⢠To erase a charac ter, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. ⢠To change between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . Note that if you press quickly twice the pred ictive text input is turned off. ⢠To insert a number in letter mo de, pr ess and hold the desired number key. Fig. 1 Predictive text input
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 73 Or press and select Insert number , key in the numbers you want, and press OK . To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠The most common punctuation marks ar e available under . Press and then repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. Use the scroll key to scroll through the list and press Select to select a character. Or press and select Insert symbol . Tip! The predictive text input will try to g uess which commonly used punctuat ion mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the diction ary. ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. You can also press , select Dictionary and select ⢠Matches - to view a list of words that corre spond to your key presses. Scroll to the desired word and press the . ⢠Insert word - to add a word (max. 32 letters ) to the dictionary by us ing tradit ional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word . ⢠Edit word - to open a view w here you ca n edit the wor d, available only if the wor d is active (underlined). Writing compo und words ⢠Write the first half of a compound word an d confirm it by pressing . Write the last part of the compound word and complete the compound word by pressing to add a space. Turning predictive tex t input off ⢠Press and select Dictionary â Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. Copying text If you want to copy text to the clipbo ard, the following are the easiest methods: 1 To select letters and words, press and hold . At t he same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 74 To select lines of text, press and ho ld . At the same time press or . 2 To end the selection, stop pressing the scroll key (whi le still holding ). 3 To copy the text to clipboa rd, while still holding , press Copy . Or, release and then press it once to open a list of editing commands, for example, Copy or Cut . If you want to remove the selected text from the document, press . 4 To insert the text into a docum ent, press and hold and press Paste . Or, press once and select Paste . Editing options When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode and situation you are in): ⢠Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode ⢠Cut , Copy - available only if text has been sele cted first. ⢠Paste - available only when text has been either cut or copied to the clipboard. ⢠Insert number , Insert symbol , and ⢠Writing language: - changes the input language fo r all editors in the phone. See â Phone settings â , p. 27 . Creating and sending new messages Note: When sending messages, your phone may display the word " Sent " . T h i s i s a n indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message centre number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destin ation. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Fig. 2 Creating a message, message types.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 75 You can start to create a message in two ways: ⢠By selecting New message â Create :â Text message , Multimedia message , or E-mail in the Messaging main view, or ⢠Start to create a message from an application that has the option Send . In this case the file that was selec ted (such as an image or text) is added to the message. Writing and sending text messages 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. See Fig. 2 , p. 74 . 2 Select Create: â Text me ssage . The editor opens with the cursor in the To: field. Press to select recipient(s) from the Contac ts directory or writ e the phone number of the recipient. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. Press to move to the message field. Options in the text message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert, Delete, Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exit . 3 Write the message. Note: Your phone supports sending of mult iple text messages at the same time, therefore, the normal 160 characte rs limit for one text message can be exceeded. If your text exceeds 160 characters, it will be sent i n two or more messages and message sending may cost y ou more. In the navigation bar, you can see the me ssage length indic ator coun ting back wards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. 4 To send the message, select Opt ions â Send or press . Sending smart messages Tip! You can also receive ringing tones, operator logos, or settings from service providers, see p. 83 . Smart messages are special text messages that can co ntain data. You can send smart messages such as: â¢p i c t u r e m e s s a g e s , ⢠business cards containing contact in formation in generic (vCar d) format, ⢠Calendar notes (vCalendar format).
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 76 For more information, see â Send ing contac t informati on â , p. 51 , â Sending calendar entri esâ , p. 105 , and â Sending bookmarks â , p. 120 . Creating and sending picture messages Your phone allows you to send and receive picture messages. Pictur e messages ar e text messages that contain s mall black-and-white gr aphics. T here are several default pictur es available in the Picture msgs. folder in Imag es . Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only phones that of fer picture message features can receive and display picture messages. To send a picture message: 1 There are two possibilities , either: ⢠Go to Images â Picture msgs. and select a picture to be sent. Select Options â Send , or ⢠Select Me ssaging â New message â Create: Text message and select Insert â Picture . 2 Enter recipient information and add text. See Fig. 3 , p. 76 . Options in the picture message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Remove picture , Delete , Message details , Help , and Exit . 3 Select Options â Send or press . Note: Each picture message is made up of several text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one text message. Multimedia messages A multimedia message can contain a combination of text and video clips, or text, images and sound clips, but not a combination of images and video clips. Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider. Only devices that of fer compatib le multimedia message or e- mail features can receive a nd display mu ltimedi a messages. Devices that donâÂÂt have these features may receive details of a link to a w eb page. Fig. 3 Editing a picture message.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 77 Settings needed for m ultimedia messaging You may receive the settings as a smart messa ge from your netw ork operator or service provider. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . Example: Domain names such as www.nokia.com can be translated into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195 . For availability of and subscrip tion to d ata services, please contact your network operator or service provider. 1 Go to Menu â Tools â Settings â Connection settin gs â Access points and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point: Connection nam e - Give a descriptive name for the conne ction. Session mode - Select a data connection type: GSM data , High speed GSM , or GPRS . Options in the multimedia message editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert, Preview message , Objects , Remove , Delet e , Message details , Sending options , He lp , and Exit . Gateway IP address - enter the address, see the example in the side of the page. Homepage - enter the address of the multimedia messaging centre. ⢠If you selected GSM data or High speed GSM , fill in: Dial-up number - a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , fill in: Access point name - the name given to you by your service provider. For further information on different data connections, see also â Connection â , p. 31 . 2 Go to Messaging â Options â Settingsâ Multimedia message . Open Preferred connection and select the access point you cr eated to be used as the preferred connection. See also â Settings for mult imedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 94 . Setting up the memory in use The memory in use defines whether the phoneâ s memory or the memory card a r e used as default. To define the memory in use: â¢G o t o Messaging and select Options â Settings â Other â Memory in use and select either the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if one is used. Creating multimedia messages Note: When you are sending a multimedia message to any phone other than Nokia 3650, Nokia 3660 or Nokia 7650, it is recommended to use a smaller image
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 78 size and a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. The default sett ing is Image size : Small . If you want to check the image size setting, go to Messaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message or sel ect Options â Sending options when you are creating a multimedia mess age. When you are sending a multimedia message to an e-mail address or anot her Nokia 3650, Nokia 3660 or a Nokia 7650, if possible, use the larger image size (n etwork dependent). To change the setting, select Options â Sending options â Image sizeâ Large when you are creating a multimedia message. 1 In Messaging, select New message â Create:â Multimedia message and press . 2 Press to select the recipient(s) from the Contacts directory or write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To: field. Add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. Press to move to the next field. 3 You can add the different objects of the mu ltimedia mess age in any order you want. ⢠To add an image, select Op tions â Insert â Image or New image. Tip! If you are sending a multimedia me ssage to an e-mail address, it is recommended to change the image size to bigger, select Options â Sending options â Image size â Large . When sending a multimedia message to another phone, use the default size Small . ⢠To add a sound, select Options â Insert â Sound clip or New sound clip . When sound has been added, the icon is show n in the navigation bar. See Fig. 4 , p. 79 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 79 ⢠To add v ideo, se lect Option s â Insert â Video clip . ⢠To write text, press . ⢠If you select Insert â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Template , a list of items opens. Scroll to the item you wish to add and press Select . Note: If you chose Image , first you need to select whether the image is stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if one is used. ⢠If you select Insert â New image , Camera opens and you can take a new picture. Press Remove to remove the picture and take another instead. ⢠If you select Insert â New sound clip , Recorder opens and you can record a new sound. The new photo or soun d is automatica lly saved and a copy is inserted in the message. Note: A multimedia message can contain only one photo and one sound or video clip. 4 To send the message, select Opt ions â Send or press . Previewing a multimedia m essage To see what the multimedia message will look like, select Options â Preview message . Removing an object from a multimedia message To remove a multimedia object, select Options â Remove â Image Video cli p or Sound clip . Press to remove text. Working with di fferent media objects To see all the different medi a objects included in a multimedia message, open a multimedia message and select Option s â Objects to open the Objects view. In the Objects view, you can change the order of the different objects, delete objects, or open an object in a corresponding application. In Fig. 5 , p. 79 , you can see a list of differen t objects and their file sizes. Fig. 4 Creating a multimedia message Fig. 5 Multimedia objects view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 80 Options in the Objects view: Open , Insert , Place image first / Place text first , Remove , Help , and Exit . E-mail Settings needed for e-mail Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must: ⢠Configure an Internet Access Point (IAP) correctly. See â Connection â , p. 31 . ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See â Settings for e-mail â , p. 96 . Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote mailb ox and Internet Service Provider. Writing and sending e-mail messages Options in the e-mail editor: Send , Add recipient , Insert , Attachments , Delete , Message details , Sending options , Help , and Exit . 1 Select New message â Create:â E-mail . The editor opens. 2 Press to select the recipient(s) from th e Contacts directory or write the e-mail address of the recipient in the To: field. Add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate eac h recipient. If you want to send a copy of your e- mail to someone, writ e the address in the Cc: field. Press to move to the next field. 3 Write the message. If you want to add an attachment to the e-mail, select Options â Insert â Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Note . will app ear in the navigation bar to indicate that the e-ma il has an attachment. Template adds pre-written text to the e- mail. You can also add an attachment to an e-mail by selecting Options â Attachments in an open e-mail. The Attachments view opens where you can add, view, and remove attachment s. Note: If you chose Image , first you need to select whether the image is stored in the phoneâÂÂs memory or the memory card, if one is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 81 Tip! If you want to send files other than photos, sounds, and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application and select the option Send â Via e-mail , if available. 4 To remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and selec t Options â Re move . 5 To send the e-mail, se lect Option s â Send or press . Note: E-mail messages are automatically plac ed in Outbox before sending. In case something goes wrong while the ph one is sending the e-mail, the e-mail is left to Outbox with the status Failed . Inbox - receiving messages Options in Inbox: Open , Create message , Delete , Message details , Move to folder , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Messages and data can be received via text message or multimedia service, via an infrared, or Bluetooth connection. When there are unread in Inbox, the icon changes to . In Inbox, the message icons tell you wh at kind of a message it is . Here are some of the icons that you may see: for an unread text message and for an unread smart message, for an unread multimedia message, for an unread service message, for data received via infrared, for data received via Bluetooth, and for an unknown message type. Viewing messages in Inbox ⢠To open a message, scroll to the message and pre ss . Use the scroll key to move up and down in the message. P ress or to move to the previous or next message in the folder.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 82 Options in different message viewers The available options depend on the type of message you have opened for viewing: ⢠Save picture - saves the picture to Images â Picture msgs.. ⢠Reply - copies the address of the sender to the To: field. Select Reply â To all - to copy the address of the sender and Cc . field recipients to th e new message. ⢠Forward - copies the message contents to an editor. ⢠Call - call by pressing . ⢠View image - allows you to view and save the image. ⢠Play sound clip - allows you to listen to the sound in the message. ⢠Objects - shows you a list of all the different multimedia o bjects in a multimedia message. ⢠Attachments - shows you a list of files sent as e-mail attachments. ⢠Message details - shows detailed inform ation about a message. ⢠Move to folder / Copy to folder - allows you to move or cop y message(s) to My folders, Inbox, or other folders you have created. See âÂÂMoving items to a folderâÂÂ, p. 14 . ⢠Add to Contacts - allows you to copy the phon e number or e-mail address of the message sender to the Contacts directory. Choose whether you want to create a new contact card or add th e information to an existing contact card. ⢠Find - Searches the message for phone numbers, e-mail addresses, and Internet addresses. After the search, you can make a call or send a message to the found number or e-mail address, or save the data to Contac ts or as a browser bookmark. Viewing multimedia messages in Inbox You can recognise multimedia messages by their icon : ⢠To open a multimedia message, scroll to it and press . You can see an image, read a message and hear a sound, simultaneously. If sound is playing, press or to incr ease or decrease the sound volume. If you want to mute the sound, press Stop .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 83 Multimedia message objects Options in the Objects view: Open , Sa ve , Send , Help , and Exit . ⢠To see what kinds of media objects have be en included in the multimedia message, open the message and select Options â Objects . In the Objects view you can view files that have been included in the multimedia message. You can choose to save the file in your phone or to send it, for exa mple, via infrared t o another device. ⢠To open a file, sc roll to it and press . Example: You can open a vCar d file and save the contact information in the file to Contacts. Important: Multimedia message objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your phone or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the send er. For more information, see â Certif. management â , p. 41 . Sounds in a multimedia message Sound objects in a multimedia message are in di cated by indicator in the navigation bar. Sounds are by default played throug h the loudspeaker. To stop the sound, press Stop while sound is playing. You can change the volume level by pressing or . ⢠If you want to listen to a sound again af ter all the objects have been shown and the playing of the sound has stopped, select Options â Play sound clip . Receiving smart messages Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture wi ll be saved to Contacts as well. Your phone can receive many kinds of smart messages, text messages that contain data (also called Over-The-Air (OTA) mes sages). To open a received smart message, open Inbox, scroll to the smart message ( ) , and press . ⢠Picture message - to save the picture in the Picture msgs. folder in Images for later use, select Op tions â Save picture . ⢠Business card - to save the contact information, select Options â Save business card. Note: If certificates or so und files are atta ched to business cards, they will not be saved. ⢠Ringing tone - to sa ve the ringing tone to Composer, select Options â Save .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 84 ⢠Operator logo - to save the lo go, select Options â Save . The operator logo can now be seen in standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification. Tip! To later change the default access point settings for browser service or multimedia messaging, go to Services â Options â Settings â Default access point or Messaging â Options â Settings â Multimedia message â Preferred connection . ⢠Calendar entry - to save the invitation to Calendar, select Op tions â Save to Calendar . ⢠WAP message - to save the bookmark, select Options â Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to the Bookma rks list in browser service. If the message contains both b rowser acce ss point settings and bookmarks, to save the data select Options â Save all . Or, select Options â View details to view the bookmark and access point information separate ly. If you do not want to save all data, select a setting or bookmark, o pen the details and select Options â Save to Settings or Save to bookmarks depending on what you are viewing. ⢠E-mail notification - Tells you how many new e-mails you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may lis t more deta iled information such as subject, sender, attachments, and so on. ⢠In addition, you can receive a text mess age service number, voice mailbox number, profile settings for remote synchronisatio n, access point settings for the browser, multimedia messaging or e-mail, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings. To save the setti ngs, select Options â Save to SMS sett. , Save to Voice mail, Save to settings , Save to Setti ngs , or Save to e-mail sett. . Service messages Options when viewing a service message: Download message , Move to folder , Message details , Help , and Exit . You can order service messages (pushed me ssages) from service providers. Service messages are notifications of, for example, ne ws headlines and they may contain a text message or address of a browser service. For availabilit y and subscription, contact your service provider. Service providers can update an existing service message every time a new service message is received. Messages can be updated even if you have moved them to another folder than Inbox. When service messages expire, they are deleted automatically.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 85 Viewing service messages in Inbo x 1 In Inbox, scroll to a service message ( ) and press . 2 To download or view the service, press Download message . The note Dow n loading message is displayed. The phone starts to make a data connection, if needed. 3 Press Back to return to I nbox. Viewing service messages in the browser When you are browsing, select Options â Read service msgs. to download and view new service messages . My folders Options in My folders: Open , New message , Delete , Message details , Move to folder , New folder , Rename , Help , and Exit . In My folders you can organise your messag es into f olders, create new folder s, and rename and delete folders. Select Options â Move to folder , New folder , or Rename folder . For more information, see âÂÂMoving items to a folderâÂÂ, p. 14 . Templates f older ⢠You can use text templates to avoid rewritin g messages that you send often. To create a new template, select Options â New template . Remote mailbox When you open this folder, you can ei ther connect t o your remote mailbox: ⢠to retrieve new e- mail he adings or messages, or ⢠view your previously retrieved e-ma il headings or messages offline.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 86 Tip! The Settings wizard program included in the PC Suite for Nokia 3660 can help you configure access point and mailbox settings. You can also copy existi ng settings, for example, from your computer to your phone. See the CD- ROM supplied in the sales package. If you select New message â Create:â E-mail or Mailbox in the Messaging main view and you have not set up your e-mail account , you will be prompted to do so. See â Settings needed for e-mai l â , p. 80 . When you create a new mailbox, the name you giv e to the mailbox automatically replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You ca n have several mailboxes (max. six). Opening the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose wh ether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages an d e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server. ⢠When you scroll to your mailbox and pres s , the phone as ks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? Select Yes to connect to your mailbox or No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. ⢠Another way to start a connection is to select Options â Connect . Viewing e-mail messag es when online When you are online, you are continuously conn ected to a remote mailbox via a data call or a packet data connection. See also â Data con nection indi cators â , p. 10 , â GSM data callsâ , p. 31 , and â Packet data (Gener al Packet Radio Servic e, GPRS)â , p. 32 . Note: If you are usi ng the POP3 protocol , e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see th e newest e-mail messages, you need to disconnect and then make a new connection to your mailbox.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 87 Options when viewing e- mail headings: Open , New message , Connect / Discon nect , Retrieve , Delete , Message details , Copy , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Viewing e-mail messages when offline When you view e-mail messages offline, yo ur phone is not connected to the remote mailbox. This mode may help you to save on connection costs. See p. 31 for further information. To view e-mail messages offlin e, you must first retrieve e-mail mess ages from your mailbox, see the next section. After you have retrieved the e-mail messages to your phone, to end the data connection, select Options â Disconnect . You can cont inue reading the retrieved e- mail head ings and/or the retrieved e-mail messages offline. You can write new e-ma il messages, reply to the retrieved e-mail messages, and forward e-mail messages. You ca n order the e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e- mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query. Retrieving e-mail messages from the mailbox ⢠If you are offline, select Op tions â Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. The remote mailbox view is similar t o the In box folder in Messaging. You can move up and down in the list by pressing or . The following icons are used to show the status of the e-mail: - new e-mail (offline or online mode). The content has not been retrieved from the mailbox to y our phone (the arro w in the icon is pointing o utwards). - new e-mail, the content has been retrieved from the mailbox (arrow pointing inwards). - for e-mail messages that have been read . - f o r e - m a i l h e a d i n g s t h a t h a v e b e e n r e ad and the message content has been deleted from the phone.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 88 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Opt ions â Retrieve â â¢ New - to retrieve all new e-mail messages to your phone. ⢠Selec ted - to retrieve onl y the e-mail mess ages that have been marked. Use the Mark/Unmark â Mark / Unmark commands to select messages one by one. See p. 13 for informa tion on how to select man y items at the same tim e. ⢠All - to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To cancel retrie ving, press Cance l . 2 After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online. Select Options â Disconnect to close the connection and to view the e-mail messages offline. Copying e-mail messa ges to another folder If you want to copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders, select Options â Copy . Select a folder from the list and press OK. Options when viewing an e-mail message: Reply , Forward , Delete , Attachments , Message details , Move to folder , Add to Contacts , Find , Help , a nd Exit . Opening e-mail messages ⢠When you are viewing e-mail messages either in online or offline mode, scroll to the e-mail you want to view and press to ope n it. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline and select Open , you will be asked if you want to retrieve th is message from the mailbox. Not e that the data connection is left open after th e e-mail has been retrieved. Select Options â Disconnect to end the data connection. Disconnecting from mailbox When you are online, select Options â Disconnect to end the data call or GPRS connection to the remote mailbox. See also â Data connection indicators â , p. 10 . Fig. 6 Viewing e-mail messages.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 89 Options in the Attachments view: Open , Retrieve , Save , Send , Delete , Help , and Exit . Viewing e-mail attachments ⢠Open a message that has the atta chment indicator and select Options â Attachments to open the Attachments view. In th e Attachments view, you can retrieve, open, or save attachments. You can a lso send attachments via infrar ed or Bluetooth. Important: E-ma il attachments may contain viru ses or otherwise be harmful to your phone or PC. Do not open any at tachment if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. For more information, see â Certif. management â , p. 41 . Tip! To save memory, you can remove attachments from an e- mail while reta ining them on the e-mail server. Select Opt ions â Delete in the Attachments view. Retrieving attachmen ts to the phone ⢠If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the phone. To retrieve the attachment, scroll to it and select Options â Retrieve . Note: If your mailbox uses the IMAP 4 pr otocol, you can decide whether to retrieve e-mail headings only, message s only, or messages and attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are e-mail headings only or messages and attachments. For further info rmation, see p. 96 . Opening an atta chment 1 In the Attachments view, scroll to an attachment and press to open it. Tip! Supported image formats are listed on p. 59 . To see a list of other file formats supported by the Nokia 3660, go and see the product information at www.nokia.com. ⢠If you are online, the attachment is retr ieved directly from the server and opened in the corresponding application. ⢠If you are offline, the phone asks if you want to retrieve the attachment to the phone. If you answer Yes , a connection to the remote mailbox is started. 2 Press Back to return to the e-mail viewer. Saving attachments separately To save an attachment, select Options â Save in the Attachments view. The at tachment is saved in the corresponding application. Fo r example, sounds can be saved in Recorder and text files (.TXT) in Notes. Note: Attachments like images can be saved on the memory card, if one is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 90 Deleting e-mail messages ⢠To delete an e-mail from the phone whil e still retaining it in the remote mailbo x. Select Options â Deleteâ Phone only. Note: The phone mirrors the e-mail head ings in the remote mailbox. So, although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your phone. If you want to remove the headin g as well, you have to first delete the e-mail message from your remote mail box and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. ⢠To delete an e-mail from both the ph one as well as from the remote mailbox. Select Options â Delete â Phone and server. Note: If you are offline, the e-mail will be deleted first from your phone. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it wil l be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the co nnec tion to the remote mailbox. Undeleting e-mail me ssages when offline To cancel deleting an e-mail from both the phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options â Undelete .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 91 Outbox Example: Messages are placed to Outbox, for example, when your phone is outside the network coverage area. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages that ar e waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox ⢠Sending - A connection is being made and the message is being sent. ⢠Waiting / Queued - Fo r example, if there are two sim ilar types of messages in Outbox, one of them is waiting until the first one is sent. ⢠Resend at (time) - Sending has failed. The phone will try to send the message again after a time-out period. Press Send if you want to re star t the sending immediately. ⢠Deferred - Yo u can set documen ts to be âÂÂon hold â while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sent and select Options â Defe r sending . ⢠Failed - The maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has failed. I f you w ere try ing to s end a text message, open the message and check that the Sending settings are correct. Viewing messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder i n your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options â SIM messages . 2 Select Options â Mark/Unmarkâ Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options â Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and press OK . Go to the folder to view the messages. Cell broadcast (network service) In the Messaging main view, select Options â Cell broadcast . You can receive messages on va rious topics, such as weathe r or traffic conditions from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. In the main view you can see:
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 92 Options in Cell broadcast: Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Unhotmark , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠the status of the topic: - for new, subscribed messages and - for new, unsubscribed messages. ⢠the topic number, topic name, and whethe r it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. You will be notified when messa ges be longing to a flagged top ic have ar rived. Note: A packet data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Contact your network operator for the correct GPRS settings. For further information on the GPRS settings, see â Packet data (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS) â , p. 32 . Service command editor In the Messagin g main vie w, select Options â Service commands . You can send service requests, such as acti va tion commands for network services (also known as USSD commands), to your service pr ovider. For more inform ation, contac t your service provider. To send a request: ⢠in standby mode or when you have an acti ve call, k ey in the command number(s) and press Send , or ⢠if you need to en ter letters as well as numbers, select Messaging â Opt ions â Service command s. Messaging settings The Messaging settings have b een divided into groups acc ording to the different message types. Scroll to the settings yo u want to edi t and pres s .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 93 Settings for text messages Options when editing text message centre settings: New msg. centre , Edit , Delet e , Help , and Exit . Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Text message to open the following list of settings: ⢠Message ce ntres - Lists all the text message servic e centres that have been defined. See â Adding a new text message centre â , p. 93 . ⢠Msg. centre in use (Message centre in use)- De fines which message centre is used for delivering text messages and smart me ssages such as pi cture me ssages. ⢠Receive report (delivery repo rt)- When this network service is set to Yes , the status of the sent message ( Pending , Failed, Delivered ) is shown in the Log. See p. 21 . ⢠Message vali dity - If the recipient of a message ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the t ext message servic e centre. Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amou nt of time allowed by the network. ⢠Message sent as - The options are Text , Fax , Paging , and E-mail . For further in formation, contact your network operator. Note: Change this option only if you are sure that your service centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. ⢠Preferred conne ction - You can send text messages vi a the normal GSM network or via GPRS, if supported by the network. See â Packet data (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS) â , p. 32 . ⢠Reply via same ctr. (network service) - By setting this option to Yes , if the recipient replies to your message, the r eturn message is sent using the same text message service centre number. Note that this may not work between all operators. Adding a new text message centre 1 Open Message centres and select Options â New msg. centre. 2 Press , write a name for the service cen tre and press OK .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 94 3 Press , press and write the number of the text message service centre ( Must be defined ). Press OK . You need the message centre nu mber to send text and picture messages. You receive the number from your service provider. ⢠To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , press and select the new service centre. Settings for multimedia messages Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multimedia message to open the following list of settings: ⢠Preferred connection ( Must be defined ) - Select which access point is used as the preferred connection for th e multimedia message centre. See â Settings needed for multimedia messaging â , p. 77 . Note: If you receive multimedia message se ttings in a sm art message and sa ve them, the received settings are auto matically used for the Preferred connection. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . ⢠Secondary conn. - Select which access point is used as the secondary connection f or the multimedia message centre. Note: Both Preferr ed connection and Secondary conn. must have the same Homepage setting pointing to the same multimedia service centre. Only the data connection is different. Example: If your preferred connection uses a pack et data connection, you may want to use high speed data or data ca ll for the secondary c onnection. This way you are able to send and receive multimedia messages even when you are not in a network that supports packet data. For availability of and subscription to data services, please contact your ne twork operator or service provider. See also â General information about data connections and access points â , p. 31 . ⢠Multimedia reception - Select:
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 95 Only in home net. - if you want to receive multimed ia messag es onl y when you are in your home network. When you are outside your home network, multimedia message reception is turned off. Always on - if you want to receiv e multimedia messages always. Off - if you do not want to receive multim edia messages or adve rtis ements at all. Important: ⢠When you ar e outside your ho me network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. â¢I f t h e s e t t i n g s Only in home net. or Always on have been selected, your phone can make an active data call or GPRS connect ion withou t your knowledge. ⢠On receiving msg. - Select: Retr. immediately - if you want the phone to retrie ve multimedia messages instantly. If there are messages with Deferred st atus, they will be retrieved as well. Defer retrieval - if you want the multimedia messag ing centre to save the message to be retrieved later. To retrieve the message later, set On receivin g msg. to Retr. immediately . Reject message - if you want to reject mult imedia messages. The multimedia messaging centre will delete the messages. ⢠Allow anon. messag es - Select No , if you w ant to reject messages coming from an anonymous sender. ⢠Receive adverts - Define whether you w ant to receive multimedi a message advertisements or not. ⢠Receive report - Set to Yes , if you want the status of the sent message ( Pending , Failed , Delivered ) to be shown in the Log. See p. 21 . Note: Receiving a delivery report o f a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 96 ⢠Deny report sending - Choose Yes , if you do not want your phone to send delivery reports of received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity - If the recipient of a message ca nnot be reached within the validity period, the message is remove d from the multimedia messagin g centre. Note that the network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. ⢠Image size - Define th e size of the ima ge in a multimedia message. The options are: Small (max. of 160*120 pixels) and Large (max. 640*480 pixels). ⢠Default Speaker - Choose Louds peaker or Handset , if you want the sounds in a multimedia message to be pl ayed throug h the loudsp eaker or the earpiece. For more information , see â Loudspeaker â , p. 15 . Settings for e-mail Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â E-mail . Open Mailbox in use to select which mailbox you want to use. Settings for Mailboxes Select Mailboxes to open a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you will be p rompted to do so. The follo wing list of settings is shown: ⢠Mailbox name - Write a descriptive name for the mailbox. ⢠Access point in use ( Must be defined ) - The Internet A ccess Point (IAP) used for the mailbox. Choose an IAP from the list. For mo re in for ma tio n o n ho w t o c rea te an IAP , see also â Connection â , p. 31 . Options when editing e- mail settings: Edit , New mailbox , Delete , Help , and Exit . ⢠My mail address ( Must be defined ) - Write the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. The address must contain the @ character. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. ⢠Outgoing mail server: ( Must be defined ) - Write the IP address or host name of the computer that sends your e-mail.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Messaging 97 ⢠Send message - Defin e how e-mail is sen t from your phone. Immediate ly - A connection to the mailbox is started immediately after you have selected Send . During nex t conn. - E-mail is sent w hen you connect to your remote mailbox the next time. ⢠Send copy to self - Sele ct Yes to s av e a c op y of th e e- ma i l t o yo ur r em o te ma i lb o x a n d to the address defined in My mail address . ⢠Include signature - Select Yes if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages and to start to write or edit a signatur e text. ⢠User name: - Write your user name, given to you by your service provider. ⢠Password: - Write your password. If you leave th is field blank, you will be prompted for the password when you try to connect to y our remote mailbox. ⢠Incoming mail server: ( Must be defined ) - The IP address or host name of the computer that receives your e-mail. ⢠Mailbox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . Note: This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. ⢠Security - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SM TP protocols to secure the connectio n to the remote mailbox. ⢠APOP secure login - Used with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server. Not shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type: . ⢠Retrieve attachment (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3) - To retrieve e- mail with or without attachments. ⢠Retrieve headers - To limit the number of e-mail he aders you want to retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User defined . Used with the IMAP4 protocol only. Settings for service messages When you go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Service message , the following list of settings opens: ⢠Service messages - Choose whether or not you want to receive service messages.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Messaging 98 ⢠Authentic. n eeded - Choose if you want to receive service messages only from authorised source s. Settings for Cell broadcast Check with your service provider whether Cell broadcast is av ailable and what the available topics and related topic numbers are. Go t o Messaging â Options â Settings â Cell broadcast to change the settings: ⢠Reception - On or Off. ⢠Language - All allows you to receive cell broadc ast messages in every possible language. Select ed allows you to choose in which la nguages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If the la nguage you want could not be found in the list, select Other . ⢠Topic detection - If you receive a message that does not belong to any of the existing topics, Topic detection â On allows you to save the topic numb er automatically. The topic number is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. Choose Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Settings for the Other folder Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Other to open the following list of settings: ⢠Save sent messages - Choose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder. ⢠No. of saved msgs. - Define how many sent messages will be saved to the Sent items folder at a time. The default limit is 20 mess ages. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use - Define memory store. Choices are phoneâÂÂs memory or memory car d , if one is used.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Profiles 99 9. Profiles Go to Menu â Profiles . In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five pr eset profiles: Gener al , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pager , which you can customise to meet your needs. Shortcut: To change the profile, press in standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate and press OK . You can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in standby mode. If the General profile is in use, only the current date is shown. The tones can be def ault ringing tones, tone s created in Composer, tones received in a message, or transferred to your phone via in frared, Bluetooth, or a PC connection and then saved to your phone. Changing the profile 1 Go to Menu â Profi les . A list of profiles opens. See Fig. 1 , p. 99 . 2 In the Profiles list, scroll to a profile and select Options â Activate. Customising profiles 1 To modify a profile, scroll to the pr ofile in the Profiles list and select Options â Personalise . A list of profile settings opens. 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change and press to open the choices: ⢠Ringing tone - To set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. When you scroll through the list, you can stop on a tone to listen to it before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. If a memory card is used, tones stored on it have the icon next to tone name. Ringing tones use shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Fig. 1 The list of Profiles.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Profiles 100 Note: You can ch ange ringing tones in two places: Profiles or Contacts. See â Adding a ringi ng tone for a c ontact card or grou p â , p. 50 . ⢠Incoming call alert - When Ascending is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by le vel to the set volume level. ⢠Ringing volume - To set the volume level for th e ringing and message alert tones. ⢠Message alert tone - To set the tone for messages. ⢠Vibrating alert - To set the phone to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messages. ⢠Keypad tones - To set the volume level for keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones - T he phone sounds a warning tone, for example, wh en the battery is running out of power. ⢠Alert for - To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from people outside the selected group will have a silent alert. The choices are All calls / (list of contact groups, if you have created them). See â Creating contact groups â , p. 51 . ⢠Profile name - You can rename a profile and give it any name you want. The General profile cannot be renamed. Fig. 2 Profile settings
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Favourites 101 10. Favourites Go to Menu â Favourites . Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. You can use Favourites to store shortcuts, lin ks to your favourite photos, video clips, notes, Recorder sound files, browse r bookmarks, and saved browser pages. The default shortcuts: - opens the Notes editor, - opens th e Calendar with the current date selected, - opens the Messaging Inbox. See Fig. 1 , p. 101 . Adding shortcuts Shortcuts can be added only from t he individu al applicati ons. Not all applicat ions have this functionality. 1 Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to add as a sh ortcut to Favourites. 2 Select Options â Add to Favourites and press OK . Note: A shortcut in Favourites is automatically updated if you move the item it is pointing to, for example, from one folder to another. Options in the Favourites main view: Open , Edit shortcut n ame , Shortcut icon , Delete shortcut , Move , List view / Gr id view , Help , and Exit . In Favourite s: ⢠To open a shortcut , scroll to the icon and press . The file is opened in the corresponding applicati on. ⢠To delete a shortcut , scroll to the shortcut you want to remove and select Options â Delete shortcut . Removing a shortcut does not affect the file it is referring to. ⢠To change the shortc ut heading , select Options â Edit shortcut name . Write the new name. This change affects only the shortcut, no t the file or item the shortcut refers to. Fig. 1 The Favourites main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Calendar and To-do 102 11. Calendar and To-do Go to Menu â Calendar Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Options when editing a calendar entry: Delete , Send , Help , and Exit . In Calendar, you can keep trac k of your appointments, meetin gs, birthdays, anniversaries, and other events. You can also set a calendar alarm to remind you of upcoming events. Calendar uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Creating calendar entries 1 Select Options â New entry and select: ⢠Meeting to remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to write a general entry f o r a day. ⢠Anniversary to remind you of birthdays or sp ecial dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields, see the â Calendar entry fi elds â section, p. 103 . See Fig. 1 , p. 102 . Use the scroll key to move between fields. Pr ess to change between upper and lower case. 3 To save the entry, press Done . Editing calendar entries 1 In the Day view, scroll to the entry and press to open it. 2 Edit the entry fields and press Done . Fig. 1 Editing a calendar entry.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Calendar and To-do 103 ⢠If you are editing a repeated e ntry, choose how you want the changes to take effect: All occurrences - all repeated entries are changed / This entry only - only the current entry will be changed. Deleting calendar entries Example: Your weekly class has been cancelled. You have set the calendar to remind you every week. Choose This entry only and the calendar will remind you again next week. ⢠In the Day view, scroll to the entr y you want to delete and s elect Optio ns â Delete or press . Press Yes to confirm. ⢠If you are deleting a repeated e n try, choose how you want the change to take effect: All occurrences - all repeated entries are deleted / This entry only - only the current entry will be deleted. Calendar entry fields ⢠Subject / Occasion - Write a description of the event. ⢠Location - the plac e of a meeting, optional. ⢠Start time , End time, Start date , and End date. ⢠Alarm - Press to activate the fields for Alarm time an d Alarm date. ⢠Repeat - Press to change the entry to repeat. Shown with in the Day view. Example: The repeat function is handy if you have a recurring event, a weekly class, a biweekly meeting, or a da ily routine you need to r emember. ⢠Repeat until - You can set an ending date for the repeated entry, for example, the ending date of a weekly course you are taki ng . This option is shown only if you have selected to repeat the eve nt. ⢠Synchronisation - If you select Private , after synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar. This is useful when, for exampl e, you synchronise your calendar with a calendar on a compatible computer at work. If you select Public , the calendar entry is shown to others who have acc ess to view your calendar online. If you select None , the calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise your calendar.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Calendar and To-do 104 Calendar views Tip! If you press in Month, Week, or Day views, todayâÂÂs date is automatically highlighted. Month view In the Month view, one row equals one week. To dayâÂÂs date is underlin ed. Dates that have calendar entries are marked wi th a small triangle at the right bottom corner. T here is a frame around the currently sele cted date. See Fig. 2 , p. 104 . ⢠To open the Day view, scroll to the date you want to open and press . ⢠To go to a cert ain date, select Options â Go to date . Write the date and press OK . Calen dar ent ry icon s in Day and Week views: - Meetin g , - Memo , and - Anniversary . Fig. 2 Month, Week, and Day vie w s in Calendar. Synchronisation icons in Month view: - Private , - Public , - None , and - the day has more than one entry. Week view In the Week view, th e calendar entries for the selected week are shown in seven day boxes. TodayâÂÂs day of the week is underlined. Memos and Annivers aries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Meeting entries are marked with coloured bars according to starting and ending times. See Fig. 2 , p. 104 . ⢠To view or edit an entry, scroll to the ce ll that has an entry and p ress to open the Day view, then scroll to the entry and press to open it.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Calendar and To-do 105 Options in the different calendar vi ews: Open , New entry , Week view / Month view , De lete , Go to date , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . Day view In the Day view, you can see the calendar en tries for the selected day. The entries are grouped according to their starting time. Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. See Fig. 2 , p. 104 . ⢠To open an entry for editing, scroll to it and press . ⢠Press to go to the next day or press to go to the previ ous day. Settings for calen dar views Select Options â Settings and select : Shortcut: To write a calendar entry, press any key ( - ) in an y calendar view. A Meet ing entry is opened and the characters you keyed in are added to the Subject field. ⢠Default view - To sele ct the view that is shown first when you open Calendar. ⢠Week starts on - To change the starting day o f the week. ⢠Week view title - To change the title of the Week view to be the week number or the week dates. Setting calendar alarms 1 Create a new Meeting or Anniver s ary entry, or open a previously created entry. 2 Scroll to Alarm and press to open the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. 3 Set the alarm time and date. 4 Press Done . An alarm indicator is shown ne xt to the entry in the Day view. Stopping a calendar alarm ⢠The alarm duration is one minute. When the alarm time expires, press Stop to end the calendar alarm. If you press any othe r key, the alarm is set to snooze. Sending calendar entries ⢠In the Day view, scroll to the entr y you want to sen d and select Options â Send . Then select the method, the choices are: Via text message , Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settin gs are in place), Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . For further
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Calendar and To-do 106 information, see the â Messagingâ chapter, â Sending and receiving data via infraredâ , p. 137 , and â Sending data via Bluetoothâ , p. 133 . To-do Go to Menu â To- do . In To-do you can keep a list of tasks that you need to do. See Fig. 3 , p. 106 . The To-do list uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . 1 To start to write a to-do note, press any key ( - ). The editor opens and the cursor blinks after the letters y ou have keyed in. 2 Write the task in the Subject field. Press to add special characters. ⢠To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field and key in a date. ⢠To set a priority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field and press . 3 To save the to-do note, press Done . Note: If you remove all char acters and press Done , the p reviously saved note will be deleted. ⢠To open a to-do note , scroll to it and press . ⢠To delete a to-do note , scroll to it and select Options â Delete or press . ⢠To mark a to-do no te as complete d , scroll to it and select Options â Mark as done . ⢠To restore a to-do note , select Option s â Mark as not done. Priority icons : - High , - Low , and (no icon) - Normal . Status icons : - task completed and - not completed. Fig. 3 Tasks in the To-do list.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Calendar and To-do 107 Importing data from other Nokia phones You can move calendar, contacts and to-do da ta from many different Nokia phones to your Nokia 3660 using the PC Suite for Nokia 3660 Data Import application. Instructions for using the application can be found in the PC Suite online help on the CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 108 12. Extras Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Extras folder. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is pro hibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Calculator Go to Menu â Extras â Calculator 1 Enter the first number of your calculation. Press to erase a mistake in the number. 2 Scroll to a function and press to select it. Options in Calculator: Last result , Memory , Cle ar screen , Help , and Exit . Use to add, to subtract, to multip ly, or to divide. 3 Enter the second number. 4 To execute the calculation, scroll to and press . Note: The Calculator has limited accura cy and rounding errors may occur, especially in long divisions. ⢠To add a decimal, press . ⢠Press and hold to clear the re sult of the prev ious calculation. Tip! Press repeatedly to scroll the functions. You can see the selection change between the functions. ⢠Use and to view previous calculations and move in the sheet. ⢠Select to save a number to the memory, indicated b y M . To retrieve the number from the memory, select . ⢠To retrieve the result of th e last calculation, select Options â Last result .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 109 Composer Go to Menu â Extras â Composer . Composer allows you to create your own, cust omised ringing tones. Note that it is not possible to edit a default ringing tone. 1 Select Options â New tone to open the editor and to start c omposing. Options in the Composer main view: Open , New tone , Delet e , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Duplicate , Help , and Exit . ⢠Use the keys to add notes and rests. See the table. Or, select Options â Insert symbol to open a list of notes and rests. The default duration for a note is 1/4. ⢠To listen to the tone, press or select Options â Play . To stop playing, press Stop . ⢠To adjust the volume select Options â Volume before you start to play the tone. ⢠To adjust the tempo, select Options â Tempo . To increase or decrease the tempo gradually, press or , respectively. Te mpo is measured in beats per minute. The maximum is 250 beats, the default tempo for a new tone is 160 beats, and the minimum is 50 beats. ⢠To select many notes or rests at the sa me time, press a nd hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠To apply different playing styles, select two or more notes and then select Options â Style â Legato - notes are played in a smoot h and even manner or select one or more notes and then select Staccato - notes are played separately to produce short sharp sounds. Options when composing: Play , Insert symbol , Style , Tempo , Volume , Help , and Exit . ⢠To move note(s) up or down on the staff by a half step, scroll to the note a nd press or . ⢠To produce C#, press and hold together with . 2 Press Back to save.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 110 Converter Go to Menu â Extras â Converter. In Converter, you can convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ). Note: The Converter has limited accura cy and rounding errors may occur. Options in Converter: Select unit / Change currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . Converting units 1 Scroll to the Type field and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use and press OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field and press to open a list of available units. Select the unit from which you want to convert and press OK . Scroll to the next Unit field and select the unit to which you want to convert. Key Note Key and function c Shortens the duration of the selected note(s)/rest(s) in steps. d Lengthens the duration of the selected note(s)/rest(s) in steps. e Inserts a rest. f Press to open a list of notes and rests. g Switches octaves, all selected no te(s) or rest (s) is/are moved to the next octave. a Deletes selected not e(s). b A long press of keys - produces a lengthened (dotted) note or rest or shortens a lengthened note.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 111 3 Scroll to th e first Amount field and key in the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and press for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Note: The conversion order changes if you write a value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the fir s t Amount field. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the Currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options â Rename currency . Setting a base currency and exchange rates Before you can make currency conversions , yo u need to choose a base currency (usually your domestic currency) and add exchange rates. Note: The rate of the base currency is alwa ys 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. Example: If you set the Euro (EUR) as the base currency, a United Kingdom Pound (GBP) is approximately 1.63575 EUR. Thus, you would write 1.63575 as the exchange rate for the GBP. 1 Select Currency as the measure type and select Options â Currency rates . A list of currencies opens and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To change the base currency, scroll to the currency (usually your domestic c urrency), and select Options â Set as base curr. Important: When you change the base currency, all previously set exchange rates are set to 0 and you need to key in new rates. 3 Add exchange rates, scroll to the currency, and key in a new rate, that is, how many units of the currency equal one unit of the base curr ency you have selected. See the example on the side of the page. 4 After you have inserted all the needed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions, see â Converting units â , p. 110 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 112 Notes Go to Menu â Extras â Notes. You can link notes to Favourites and send them to other devices. Plain text files (TXT format) you receive can be saved to Notes. ⢠Press ( - ) to start to wri te. Press to clear letters. Press Done to save. Clock Go to Menu â Extras â Clock . Changing clock settings ⢠To change the time or date, select Options â Settings in Clock. To change the clock shown in standby mode, scroll down in the Date and time settings and select Clock type â Analogue or Digital . Options in Clock: Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Settings , Help , and Exit . Setting an alarm 1 To set a new alarm, selec t Options â Set alarm . 2 Enter the alarm time and press OK . When the alarm is active, the indicato r is shown. Note: The alar m clock works even if the phone is switched off. ⢠To cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Options â Remove alarm . Turning off the alarm â¢P r e s s Stop to turn off the alarm. ⢠When the alarm tone sounds, press any key or Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume. You can do this a maximum of five times.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 113 If the alarm time is reached while the phone is switched off, the phone switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you press Stop , the phone asks whether you want to activate the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phone or Yes to make and receive calls. Note: Do not pr ess Yes when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Recorder Go to Menu â Extras â Recorder . The voice recorder allows you to record tele phone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conver sation, both parti es will hear a tone ever y five seconds during recordin g. Options in Recorder: Open , Record sound clip , Delete , Move to phone mem , Move to mem. card , Mark/Unmark , Rename sound clip , Send , Add to Favourites , Settings , Help , and Exit . Note: Obey all local laws governing record ing of calls. Do not use this feature illegally. ⢠Select Opt ions â Record sound clip and scroll to a function and press to sel ect it. Use: - to record, - to pause, - to stop, - to fast forward, - to fast rewind, or - to play an opened sound file. Note: Recorder cannot be used when a data call or a GPRS connection is active. Games Go to Menu â Games . To start a game, pr ess Menu â Games , scroll to the game ico n and press . For instructions on how to play the game, press Options â Help .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 114 Memory card Go to Menu â Extras â Memory card . If you have a memory card you can use it to store your multimedia files like video clips and sound files, photos, messaging information, and to backup information from your phoneâÂÂs memory. The memory card in the sales packa ge may co ntain promotional material of third parties which you can delete. Important: Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Note: Details of how you can use the memory card with other features and applications of your Nokia 3660 a re given in the sections describing th ese features and applications. Options in the memory card: Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Set password , Change password , Remove password , Unlock memory card , Memory details , Help and Exit . To insert the memory card Fig. 1 Positioning and securing the memory card. AB
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Extras 115 1 Make sure the phone is switched off. If it âÂÂs on, press and hold to switch off the phone. 2 With the back of the phone facing you, slide o pen the cover and remove the battery, see Quick start guide âÂÂInsert the SIM card and load the batteryâ for instruction s on removing the cover. 3 Position the memory card in its slot as shown in Fig. 1 A, p. 114 . Make sure that the gold cont acts of the card are facing down. 4 Slide the silver catch over the memory card to secure it in its place, see Fig. 1 B, p. 114 . 5 When you have secured the card in pla c e, replace the battery, then replace the cover by sliding it back into place. Important: Do not remove the memory card in middle of an operation. Be sure to close all memor y card applicat ions before rem oving the ca rd. Important: If you are installing an applic atio n to the memory card and need to reboot the phone, do not remove the card until the reboot is complete. Otherwise the application files may be lost. Format memory card You must format the memory card befo re you can use it for the first time. ⢠Select Options â Format mem. card . You will be asked to confirm your request and once you confirm, formatting start s, see Fig. 2 , p. 115 . Backing up and restoring information You can backup information from yo ur phoneâÂÂs memory to the memory card. ⢠Select Options â Backup phone mem. You can restore information from th e memory card to the phoneâÂÂs memory. ⢠Select Options â Restore from card . Fig. 2 Format memory card.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Extras 116 Memory card password You can set a password to lock your memory card against unauthorised use. Note: The password is stored in your phone and you donâÂÂt have to enter it again while you are using the memo ry card on the same phone. If you use the memory card on another phone, you w ill be asked for the password. To set, change, or remove yo ur password ⢠Select Options â Set password , Chang e password , or Remove password . For every option you will be asked to enter an d confirm your passwo rd. The password can be up to eight characters long. Important: Once the password is removed, the memory ca rd is unlocked and can be used on another phone without a password. Unlocking a memory card If you insert another password protected memory card in yo ur phone, you will be prompted to enter the password of the card. To unlock the card, ⢠Select Options â Unlock mem ory card . Checking memory consumption Using the Memory details option, you can check the memory consumption of different data groups and the available memory for inst alling new applications or software on yo ur memory card. ⢠Select Options â Memory details .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 117 13. Services (XHTML) Go to Menu â Services or press and hold in standby mode. Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Glossary: X HTML browser supports pages written in the Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) and the Wireless Markup Language (WML). Various service providers on the Internet main tain pages specifically designed for mobile phones, offering services such as news, weather reports, ba nking, tra vel information, entertainment, and games. With the XHTML br owser you can view these services as WAP pages written in WML, XHTM L pages written in XHTML, or a mixture of both. Note: Check the availability of services, pric ing, and tariffs wi th your network operator and/or service provider. Service pr oviders wil l also give you instructions on how to use their services. Basic steps for accessing ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the web service that you want to use. See the next section â Setting up the phone for the browser service â . ⢠Make a connection to the service. See p. 118 . ⢠Start browsing the web pages. See p. 120 . ⢠End the connection to the service. See p. 123 . Fig. 1 The Bookmarks view with the Go to field at the bottom.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Services (XHTML) 118 Setting up the phone for the browser service Receiving settings in a smart message Tip! Settings may be available, for example, on the site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive service settings in a specia l text mess age, a so-call ed smart me ssage, from the network operator or service pr ovider that offer s the service. See â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Keying in the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. 1 Go to Settings â Connection settingsâ Access points and define the settings for an acces s point. See â Connection â , p. 31 . 2 Go to Services â Opt ions â Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the browser page defi ned for the current access point. Making a connection Tip! To access the Bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view again, select Options â Back to page . Once you have stored all the required connec tion settings, you can access browser pages. There are three different ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the homepage ( ) of your service provider, ⢠Select a bookmark from the Bookmarks v iew, or ⢠Press the keys - to start to write th e address of a browser serv ice. The Go to field at the bottom of the display is i mmediately activated and you can continue writing the address there. After you have selected a page or written th e address, press to start to download the page. See also â Data connection indicators â , p. 10 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 119 Connection security If the security indicator is displayed du ri ng a connection, the data transmission between the phone and the browser gatewa y or server is encrypted and secure. Note: The security icon does no t indicate that data transmiss ion between the gateway and the content server (place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. It is up to the service provider to secure data tran smissio n between the gateway and the content server. Viewing bookmarks Options in the Bookmarks view (selection on a bookmark or folder): Open , Downloa d , Back to page , Send , Go to URL address / Find bookmark , Add bookmark , Edit , Delete , Read service ms gs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Clear cache , Details , Add to Favouri tes , Settings , Help , and Exit . Glossary: A bookmark consi sts of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, WAP access point, and if the service requires, a user name and password. Note: Your phone may have some pre-insta lled bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endor se these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as yo u would with any site. In the Bookmarks view, you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of web pages. Bookmarks are indicated by the following icons: - The starting page defined for the br owser access point. If you use another web access point for browsing, the star ting page is changed accordingly. - The last visited page. When the phone is disconnected from the service, the address of the last visited page is kept in memory until a new page is visited during the next connection. - A bookmark showing the title. When you scroll through bookmarks, you ca n see the address of the highlighted bookmark in the Go to field at th e bottom of the display. See Fig. 1 , p. 117 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights reserved. Services (XHTML) 120 Options when browsing: Open , Service options , Bookmarks , History , Go to URL address , View image , Read service msgs. , Save as bookmark , Send bookmark , Reload , Disconnect , Show images , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Session , Security , Settings , H elp , and Exit . Adding bookmarks manually 1 In the Bookmarks view, select Options â Add bookmark. 2 Start to fill in the fields, see Fig. 2 , p. 120 . Only the address must be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookma rk if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Select Options â Save to save the bookmark. Sending bookmarks ⢠To send a bookmark, scroll to it and select Options â Send â Via text message . Browsing On a browser page, new links appear unde rlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. See Fig. 3 , p. 121 . Keys and commands used in browsing ⢠To open a link, press . ⢠To scroll the view, use the scroll key. ⢠To enter letters and numbers in a fie ld, press the keys - . Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. ⢠To go to the previous page while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available, select Options â History to view a chronological list of the pages you hav e visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a se ssion is closed. ⢠To check boxes and make selections, p ress . ⢠To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options â Reload . ⢠To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open web page, s elect Options â Service opti ons . Fig. 2 Editing a bookmark.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 121 ⢠Press and hold to disc onnect from a web service and to quit browsing. Viewing new service messages while browsing To download and view new service messages while browsing: 1 Select Options â Read service msgs. (shown only if there are new messages). 2 Scroll to the message and press to download and open it. For more information abou t service messages, see â Service messages â , p. 84 . Saving bookmarks ⢠To save a bookmark while browsing, select Options â Save as bookmark . ⢠To save a bookmark received in a smart me ssage, open the message in the Inbox in Messaging and select Options â Save to bookmarks . See also â Receiving smart messages â , p. 83 . Viewing saved pages Options in the Saved pages view: Open , Ba ck to page , Reload , Remove , Read service ms gs. , Disconnect , Move to folder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Rename , Clear cache , Details , Add to Favouri tes , Settings , Help , and Exit . If you regularly browse pages containing in formation which doesnâÂÂt change very often, for example a train timetable, you can save and then browse them when offline. ⢠To save a page, while browsing select Options â Save page . Saved pages are indicated by the following icon: - The saved web page. In the saved pages view you can also crea te folders to store your saved web pages. Folders are indicated by the following icon: - Folder containing saved web pages. Fig. 3 A web page.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Services (XHTML) 122 ⢠To open the Saved pages view, press in the Bookmarks view, see Fig. 4 , p. 122 . In the Saved pages view, press to open a saved page. If you want to start a connection to the web se rvice and to retrieve the page again, select Options â Reload . You can also arrange the pages into folders. Note: The phone stays online after you reload the page. Downloading You can download items such as ringing tone s, images, operator logos and video clips through the mobile browser. These item s can be provided free or for a price. Once downloaded, items are handled by the re spective applications on your phone, for example a downloaded photo will be saved in the Images . Note: The informa tion or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of t he phone. A cach e is a buff er me mo ry that is used to store data temporarily. If you have trie d to access or have access ed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your ba nk account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. To empty the cache, select Options â Clear cache . Downloading directly from the web page To download the item directly from a web page: ⢠Scroll to the link and select Option s â Open . Fig. 4 The Saved pages view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Services (XHTML) 123 Purchasing an item Glossary: Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a sy stem for protecting the copyright of digital content that is distributed online. Note: Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. To download the item: ⢠Scroll to the link and select Options â Open . ⢠Choose the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, Buy. Checking an item before downloading You can see details about an item before you download it. Details about an item may include the price, brief description and size. Note: Check with your service provide to see if they off er this service. ⢠Scroll to the link and select Options â Open . Details about the item are displa yed on your phone. See Fig. 5 on p. 123 . ⢠If you want to continue w ith the downloadi ng, press Accept or if you want to cancel the download, press Cancel . Ending a connection ⢠Select Options â Disconnect , or ⢠Press and hold to qui t browsing and to return to standby mode. Browser settings ⢠Default access point - I f y o u w a n t t o c h a n g e t h e d e f a ult access point, press to open a list of available access po ints. The current default access point is highlighted. For more information, see â Connection â , p. 31 . Fig. 5 Example of details in a content file.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Services (XHTML) 124 ⢠Show images - Choose if you want to view pict ures when you are browsing. If you choose No , you can later load images du ring browsing by selecting Options â Show images . ⢠Font size - You can choose five text sizes in the browser: Small est , Smal l , Normal , Large , and Largest . ⢠Default encoding - To make sure your browser pages display text cha racters correctly, select the appropriate language type. ⢠Cookies - Allow / Reject . You can enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. ⢠Conf. DTMF se nding - Always / First time only . The browser supports functions you can access while browsing. You can: make a vo ice call while you are on a browser page, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in p rogress, save in Contacts a name and phone number from a browser page. Choose whethe r you want to confirm before the ph one sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also âÂÂDTMF tonesâÂÂ, p. 20 . ⢠Text wrapping - Choose Off if you donâÂÂt want th e text in a paragraph to automatically wrap, or On if you do.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Applications (Javaâ¢) 125 14. Applications (Javaâ¢) Go to Menu â Applications Note: Your phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohib ited or when it may cause interference or danger. Options in the Applications main view: Open , View details , Settings , Remove , Go to URL address , Update , Help , and Exit . In the Applications main view you can open installed Java appl icatio ns or r em ove th em . In the Install view you can install new Java applications ( file extensions .JAD or .JAR). Note: Your phone supports J2MEâ¢Java applications. Do not download PersonalJava⢠applications to your phone as they cannot be installed. When you open Applications, you can see a li st of Java applications that have been installed to your phone. See Fig. 1 on p. 125 . ⢠Scroll to an application and select Options â View details to view: ⢠Status - Installed , Running , or Downloaded (shown only in Install view), ⢠Version - the application vers ion number, ⢠Supplier - the supplier or manufacturer of the application, ⢠Size - the size of the applic ation file in kilobytes, ⢠Type - a brief description of the application, ⢠URL - an address of an informat ion page on the Internet, and ⢠Data - the size of application data su ch as high scores, in kilobytes. ⢠To start a data connection and to view extra information about the application, sc roll to it and select Options â Go to URL address . ⢠To start a da ta connection an d to check if there is an update available for the application, scroll to it and select Options â Update . Applications uses shared memory. See â Shared memory â , p. 16 . Fig. 1 Applications main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Applications (Javaâ¢) 126 Installing a Java application Options in the Install view: Install , View details , Delete , Help , and Exit . Installation files may be transferred to your phone from a computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia mess age, as an e-mail att achment, via Bluetooth, or via infrared. If you are using PC Suite for Nokia 3660 to transfer the file, place it in the c:\nokia \installs folder in your phone. Important: Only install software from sour ces that offer adequate protection against viruses and other har mful software. 1 In the Applications main v iew, to view the installation packages, press to open the Downloaded view. Note: In the Install view, you can only inst all Java software installation files with the extension .JAD or .JAR. 2 To install an application, s croll to an inst allation file and select Options â Install. Alternatively, search the phone memory for the ins tallation file, select the file, and press to start the insta llation. See the example on the side of the page. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e- mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e- mail, open the Attachments view, scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. 3 Press Yes to confirm the installation. The .JAR file is required fo r installation. If it is miss ing, the phone may ask y ou to download it. If there is no access point defi ned for Applications, you will be asked to select one. When you are downloading the JAR f ile, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server . You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the pa ckage to be installed. The phone shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options whether to continue with or canc el the installation. Once the phone has checked the integrity of the software packag e, the appli cation is installed on your phone. 4 The phone informs you when installation is complete. To open the Java application after in stallation, you must go to the Applications main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Applications (Javaâ¢) 127 Tip! When you are browsing WAP or b r owser pages, you can download an installation file and install it immediat ely. Note, however, that the connection is left running in the backgr ound during installation . Opening a Java application ⢠Scroll to an application in the Applicat ions main view and press to open it. Uninstalling a Java application ⢠Select the application in the Applications main view and select Options â Remove . Java application settings To define a default access point for download ing missing applicati on components, select Options â Settings â Default access point . For more information on creating access points, see the â Access po ints â , p 34 . Select an application and select Options â Settings , and then select one of: ⢠Access point - Select an access point to be us ed by the application for download ing extra data. ⢠Network connection - Some Java applications may require a data connection to be made to a defined access point. If no access poi nt has been selected, yo u will be asked to select one. The options are: Allowed - The connection is created immediately without a notification. Ask first - You will be asked before the application makes the connection. Not allowed - Connections are not allowed.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Manager - installing appl ications and software 128 15. Manager - installing applications and software Go to Menu â Tools â Manager Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Tool s fold er. Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is pro hibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Options in the Manager main view: View deta ils , View certificate , Install , Remove , View log , Send log , Memory details , Help , and Exit . In Manager you can install new applicati ons and softwa re packages, a nd remove applications from your phone. You ca n also check the memory consumption. When you open Manager, you can see a list of: ⢠installation packages that ha ve been saved to Manager, ⢠partially installed applications (indi cated by ), and ⢠fully installed applications that you can remove (indicated by ). Note: In Manager, you can only use device software installation files with an extension .SIS. Tip! To install Java⢠applications (file extension .JAD or .JAR), go to Applications. For further inf ormation, se e â Applications (Javaâ¢) â , p. 125 . ⢠Scroll to an installation file and select Options â View details to view the Name , Version , Type , Size , Supplier , and Status of the software package. ⢠Scroll to a software package and select Options â View certificate to display the security certificate details of a software package. See â Certif. managementâ , p. 41 . Important: Only install software from sour ces that offer adequate protection against viruses and other har mful software. To help you, the software installation system uses digital signatures and certificates on software packages. Do not in stall the application if Manager gives a security warning during installation.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Manager - installing appl ications and software 129 Installing software You can install applications that are specific ally intended for the Nokia 3660 or suitable for the Symbian operating system. A software package is us ually one large compres sed file containing many component files. Tip! Sele ct Options â View lo g to see what software packages have been installed or removed and when. Note: If you install a program that is not in te nded specifically for the Nokia 3660, it may function and look very differen t from the usual Nokia 3660 applications. Important: If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only re store the original applicatio n if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, first remov e the application and then install the application again from the original in stallation file or the back-up copy. 1 Installation packages may be transferred to your phone from a computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a mult imedia message, as an e-mail attachment, via Bluetooth, or via infrared. If you are us ing PC Suite for Nokia 3660 to transfer the file, place it in the c:\nokia\installs folder on your phone. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e- mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e- mail, open the Attachments view, sc roll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. 2 Open Manager, scroll to the installation package, and select Options â Install to start the installation. Alternatively, search the phone memory or the memory card for the installation file, select the file, and press to start the in stallation. See the example on the side of the page. If you are installing softwar e without a digita l signature or a certificate, the phone warns you of the risks of installing so ftware. Continue installation on ly if you are absolutely sure of the origin and contents of the software package. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the pa ckage to be installed. The phone shows information about the checks be ing c arried out and you are given options whether to continue or cancel the installati on. Once the phone has checked the integrity of the software package, the applic ation is installed on your phone.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Manager - installing appl ications and software 130 Tip! To send your installation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, select Options â Send log â Via text message or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Removing software 1 To remove a softwa re package, scrol l to it and select Options â Remove. 2 Press Yes to confirm the removal. Important: If you remove software, you can only re-insta ll it if you have the original softwar e package or a full back -up of the remo ved so ftware package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If another so ftware package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Viewing memory consumption ⢠To open the me mory view select Optio ns â Memory details . Note: If you have a memory card installe d on your phone, you will have a choice of two memory views, one for the phone or Phone me mory and one for the Memory card . If not, you will only have the Phone memory view. When you open either of the memory views, the phone calculates the amount of free memory for storing data and in stalling new software. In the memory v iews, you can view the memory consumption of the different data groups: Calendar , Contacts, Documents, Messages , Images , Sound files , Video clips , Applicati ons , Mem. in use , and Free memory . Tip! If the phone memory is getting low, remove some documents, or move them to the memory card. See also the â Troubleshooting â chapter, p 141 .
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 131 16. Connectivity Go to Menu â Connectivity â Bluetooth Note: Your phone must be switched on to use the functions in the Connectivity folder. Do not switch the phone on when wi reless phone use is prohibit ed or when it may cause interference or d anger. You can transfer data from your phone to another compatible device, for example, a phone or a computer, via Bluetooth or infrared. Bluetooth connection Note: The Nokia 3 660 phone is designed to be compliant with and to adopt Bluetooth Specification 1.1. However, intero perability between the phone and other products with Bluetooth wireless te chnology depends also on the profiles and protocols used. For more information on the compatibility between Bluetooth devices, please consult your dealer. Bluetooth enables cost-free wireless connect ions between electronic devices within a maximum range of 10 metres. A Bluetooth co nnection can be used to send images, videos, texts, business cards, calendar note s, or to connect wirelessly to Bluetooth- enabled devices such a s computers. Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. See Fig. 1 , p. 131 . The two devices only need to be within a maxi mum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. Fig. 1 Using Bluetooth.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 132 Using Bluetooth consumes the battery and th e phone's operating time will be reduced. Take this into account when performing other operations wit h your phone. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your local authorities. Activating Bluetooth application for the first time When you activate the Bluetooth application for the first time, you are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phone. Note: Afte r you have set Bluetooth to be active and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , your phone and t his name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. ⢠Write a name (max. 30 letters). If you send data via Bluetooth before you have given an individual Bluetooth name to your phone, the default name will be used. Bluetooth settings To modify Bluetooth settings, scroll to the setting you want to change and press . ⢠Bluetooth - Select On if you want to use Bluetooth. If you set Bluetooth Off all active Bluetooth connections are ended and Blue tooth cannot be used for sending or receiving data. ⢠My phone's visibility - If you select Shown to all your phone can be fo und by other Bluetooth devices during device search. If you select Hidden your phone cannot be found by other devices during device search. ⢠My Bluetooth name - Define a Bluetooth name for your phone. After you have set Bluetooth to be active and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , this name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Fig. 2 Bluetooth settings
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 133 Tip! To send text via Bluetooth (instead of text messages), go to Notes , write the text, and select Options â Sendâ via Bluetooth . Tip! When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Bluetooth addresses (device addres ses). To find out the unique Bluetooth address of your phone, enter the code *#2820# in standby mode. Sending data via Bluetooth Note: There can be only one active Bluetooth conne ction at a time. 1 Open an application where the item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send a photo to another device, open the Images application. 2 Scroll to the item you want to se nd , for exampl e, a photo and s elect Options â Send â Via Bluetooth . 3 The phone starts to search for devices with in range. Bluetooth enabled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. S ee Fig. 3 , p. 133 . You can see a device icon, the deviceâÂÂs Bluetooth name, the device type, or a short name. Paired devices are shown with . Note: If you have searched for Bluetooth de vices earlier, a list of the devic es that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list of devices is cleared and the device search needs to be started again before sending data. ⢠To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a connection to one of the devices already found . Fig. 3 Sending an image via Bluetooth, the phone starts to search for devices.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 134 Glossary: Pairing means authentication. The users of the Bluetooth-enabled devices should agree together what the passcode is, and use the same passc ode for both devices in order to p air them. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. 4 Scroll to the device you want to connect with and press Select . The item you are sending is copied to Outbox and the note Connecting is shown. 5 Pairing (if not require d by the other device, go to step 6 ) ⢠If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds and you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1-16 characters long, nu meric) and agree with the owner of the other Bluetooth device to us e the same code. This passcode is used only once and you do not have to memorise it. ⢠After pairing, the device is sa ved to the Paired devices view. 6 When the connection has been successfully established, the note Sending data is shown. Note: Data received via Bluetooth can be found in the Inbox folder in Messaging. See p. 81 for furthe r informat ion. Icons for different Bluetooth devices: - Computer , - Phone , - Other , and - Unknown . Note: If sending fails, the message or data w ill be deleted. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent via Bluetooth. Checking the statu s of the Bluetooth connection ⢠When is shown in standby mode, Bluetooth is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is trying to connect to the other device. ⢠When is shown continuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Paired devices view Pairing with a device makes device search es ea sier and quicker. Paired devices are easier to recognise, they are indicated by in th e search result list. In the Bluetooth main view, press to open a list of paired devices ( ).
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 135 Options in the paired devices vi ew: New paired device , Connect / Discon nect , Assign short name , Delete , Delete all , Set as authorised / Set as unauthorised , Help , and Exit . Pairing with a device 1 Select Options â New paired device in the Paired devices view. Th e phone starts to search for devices within range. Or, if you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier, a list of the devices that were found previous ly is shown first. To start a new sea rch, select More de vices . 2 Scroll to the device you want to pair with and press Select . 3 Exchange passcodes, see step 5 (Pairing) in the previ ous se ction. The device is added to the Paired devices list. Cancelling pairing Tip! You can also play phone-to-phone games via Bluetooth. ⢠In the Paired devices view, scroll to the de vice whose pairing you want to cancel and press or select Options â Delete . The device is removed from the Paired devices list and the pairing is cancelled. ⢠If you want to cancel all pairings, s elect Options â Delete all . Note: If you are currently connected to a dev i ce, and d elete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately but the connection will remain active. Assigning short names for paired devices Example: Give a short name to you r friendâÂÂs Bluetooth-enabled device or to your own computer to be able to recognise it more easily. You can define a short name (nickna me, alias), to help you recognise a certain device. This name is stored in the phone memory and cann ot be seen by other Bluetooth device users. ⢠To assign a short name, scroll to the device and select Options â Assign short name . Write the short name and press OK . Note: Choose a name which is easy to reme mb er and recognise. Later when you are searching for devices or a device is requesting a connection, the name you have chosen will be used t o identify t he device.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 136 Setting a device to be auth orised or unauthorised After you have paired with a device, you ca n set it to be authorised or unauthorised: Unauthorised (default) - Connection requests from this device need to be accepted separately every time. Authorised - Connections between your phone and th is device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptan ce or authorisation is needed . Use this status for your own devices, for example, your PC, or devices t hat belong to someone you trust. The icon is added next to authorised devices in the Paired devices view. See Fig. 4 , p. 136 . ⢠In the Paired devices view, scroll to the device and select Option s â Set as authorised / Set as unauthorised . Receiving data via Bluetooth When you receive data via Bluetooth, a tone sounds and you are asked if you want to accept the Bluetooth message. If you accept, is shown and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Bluetooth messages are indicated by . See p. 81 for further information . Disconnecting Bluetooth A Bluetooth connection is di sconnected automatically after sending or receiving data. Infrared connection To start infrared, go to Menu â Connectivity â Infrared Via infrared, yo u can send or rece ive data su ch as business cards and calendar notes to and from a compatible phone or data device. Do not point the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product. Fig. 4 Two devices are set to be au thorised.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 137 Sending and receiving data via infrared Note: All items which are received via infrared are placed in the Inbox f older in Messaging. New infrared messages are indicated by . See p. 81 for further information. Tip! You can also play phone-to-phone games via i nfrared. 1 Make sure that the infrared ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there ar e no obstructions between th e devices. The preferable distance between the two devices is one metr e at most. To find the infrared port, see the Keys and parts picture in the Quick star t guide. Example: T o s e n d a contact card via infrared: (1) Ask the receiver to activate th e infrared port in his/her device. (2) Go to Contacts, scroll to a card and select Options â Send business card â via infrared . 2 The user of the receiving device activates the infrared port. To activate the infrared port of your phone to receive data via infrared, go to Menu â Connectivity â Infrared and press . 3 The user of the sending device selects the desired infrared function to start data transfer. To send data via infrared, select Options â Send â via infrar ed in an application. If data transfer is not started within one minute after the activation of the infrared port , the connection is cancelled and must be started again. Note: Windows 2000: To be able to use infrared to transfer files between your Nokia 3660 and a compatible computer, go to âÂÂControl Panelâ a n d select âÂÂWireless LinkâÂÂ. In the âÂÂWireless Linkâ âÂÂFile Transf er â tab check the âÂÂAllow othersâ to send files to your computer using infrared. Checking the status of th e infrared connection ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to co nnect to the other device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown continuously, the infrar ed connection is active and your phone is ready to send and receive data via its infrared port.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 138 Connecting your phone to a computer For further in formation on how to make a connection to a compatible computer via infrared or Bluetooth, and how to install the PC Suite for Nokia 3660, see the Installation Guide for PC Sui te on the CD -ROM in the âÂÂInstallâ se ction. For further information on how to use the PC Suite for Nokia 366 0, see the PC suite online help . Using the CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch itself after you ha ve inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of your compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Window Start button and select Programs â Windows Explorer. 2 On the CD-ROM drive, locate a file called Nokia3660.exe and double-click it. The CD- ROM interface opens. 3 You can find PC Suite for Nokia 3660 in th e âÂÂInstallâ section. Double-click âÂÂPC Suite for Nokia 36 60 â . The installation wizard will gu ide you through the installation process. Using your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet or to send or receive faxes Detailed installati on instructions can be found in Quick guide for Mo dem Options for Nokia 3660 on the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Sync - remote synchronisation Go to Menu â Connectivity â Sync Note: You have to download the Sync app lication from the Nokia web site www.nokia.com/phones/3660/support.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Connectivity 139 The Sync application enables you to synchronis e your calendar or contacts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. Synchronisation takes place ov er a GSM data call or packet data connectio n. The synchronisation applicat ion uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, please contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone d ata with. Glossary: Synchronisation profile is the settings for the remote server. You can create several profiles if you need to synchronise your data with multiple servers or applications. Creating a new synchronisation profile 1 If no profiles have been de fined, the phone asks you if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Options â New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default setting values or cop y the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name - Write a descriptive name for the profile. Options in Remote sync main view: Synchronise , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Delete , View lo g , Help , and Exit . Bearer type / Host address / Port / HTTP authentication - Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Access point - S e l e c t a n a c c e s s p o i n t y o u w a n t t o use for the data connection. For more information, see â Connection â , p. 31 . User name - Your user ID for the synchronisatio n server. Contact your service provider or system administ rato r for your correct ID. Password - Write your password. Contact yo ur service provider or system administrator for the correct value. Calendar - Select Yes if you want to synchronise your calendar. Remote calendar - Enter a correct path to the remote calendar on the server. Must be defined if the previous setting Calendar has been set to Yes . Contacts - Select Yes if you want to synchronise your contacts.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Connectivity 140 Remote contacts - Enter a correct path to the remo te address book on the server. It must be defined if the previous setting Contacts has been set to Yes . 3 Press Done to save the settings. Synchronising data In the Sync main view, you can see the different profiles. See Fig. 5 , p. 140 . You can also see which protocol the profile uses: http or WAP and what kind of data will be synchronised: Calendar, Contacts, or both. 1 In the main view, scroll to a profile and select Options â Synchronise . The st atus of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchron isation before it is finished, press Cancel . 2 You are notified when the synchronisation has been co mpleted. ⢠After synchronisation is complete, press View log or select Options â View log to open a log file showing t he synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronised) in the ph one or on the server. Fig. 5 The Remote synchronisation main view.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Troubleshooting 141 17. Troubleshooting Memory lo w When the following notes are shown, the phone memory is low and you must start to delete some data: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, go to Manager and select Option s â Memory details . You may want to delete the following items regularly t o avoid memory ge tting low: ⢠messages from the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent folders in Messaging, ⢠retrieved e-mail message s from the phone memory, ⢠saved browser pages, and ⢠images and photos in Images. If you want to delete contact in formation, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game sc ores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and another of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data firs t. or Memory low. Delete some data., try deleting items one by on e (starting from the smallest item). Clearing calendar memory - To remove more than one event at a time, go to the Month view and select Options â Delete entry â and either ⢠Before date - to de lete all calendar not es which take place before a certain date. Enter the date before which all calendar notes will be deleted , or ⢠All entries - to delete all calendar notes. Erasing log informatio n - To erase all the log contents, Recent calls register, and Mes saging delivery reports permanently, go to Logs and select Options â Clear log or go to Settings â Log duration â No log. Different ways to store data : ⢠us e PC Suite for Nokia 3660 to take a backup copy of all data to your computer, see p. 138 , ⢠send images to your e-mail address and then save the images to your computer, or ⢠send data via infrared or Bluetooth to another device.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Troubleshooting 142 Q&A Phone display ⢠Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my phone? A: This is an intrinsic charac teristic of the active matrix display. Your phoneâÂÂs display contains multiple switching elements to control the pixels. A small number of missing, discoloured, or bright dots on the screen might exist. Camera ⢠Q: Why doe s the image appear dark when I am taking a picture with the Camera or viewing image s? A: The display contrast setting affects the appearance of images. Check the display contrast setting and adjust it to lighter. Go to Settings â Phone settings â Display â Contrast . ⢠Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Check that the camera lens protection window is clean. To clean the window follow the instructions in â Care and mainte nance â , p. 146 . Bluetooth ⢠Q: Why ca nâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is pair ing with your phone but not sending data, and leaves the device connection open, then the only way to disconne ct it is to deac tivate the Bluetooth link altoget her. Go to Bluetooth and select the setting Bluetooth â Off. ⢠Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs Blueto oth-enabled device. A: Check that both have activated Bluetooth. Check that the di stance betw een t he two devi ces is not over 10 metres or that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in âÂÂHiddenâ mode. Multimedia messaging ⢠Q: What should I do when the phone tells me that it cannot receive a multimedia message because memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Delete some data first. To view wha t kind of data you hav e and how much memory the different data groups consume, go to Manager and select Options â Memory details . After you have freed up me mory , the multimedia message centre tries to send the multimedia messages again automatically. ⢠Q: What should I do when the phone gives the message: Unable to retrieve multimed ia message. Network connection already in use. ? A: End all active data connec tions. Multimedia messages cannot be received if another data connection using a different gateway address is active for browse r or e-mail. ⢠Q: How can I end t he data connection when the phone starts a data connection again and again? Th e notes: Retrieving message or Trying to retrieve message again are shown briefly. What is happening?
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Troubleshooting 143 A: The phone is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging centre. Check that the settings for multimedia messaging have been defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Go t o Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multime dia message . To stop the phone from making a data connection, you have the following options. Go to Messaging and select Options â Settings â Multime dia message , and then: ⢠Select On receiving msg. â Defer retrieval if you want the multimedia messaging centre to save the message to be retrieved later, for example , after you have checked the settings. A fter this chan ge, the phone still needs to send information notes to the network. To retrieve the message later, select Retr. imme diately . ⢠Select On receiving msg. â Reject message - if you want to reject all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the phone needs to send info rmation notes to the network and the multimedia messaging centre will delete all multimedia message s that are waiting to be sent to you. ⢠Select Multimedia reception â Off - if you want to ignore all incoming multim edia messa ges. After t his change the phone will not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging. Images ⢠Q: Is the format of the image IâÂÂm try ing to open supported? A: See p. 59 for further information on the support ed image formats. Messaging ⢠Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: If you cannot select a contac t in the Contacts directory, the contact card does not have a phone number or an e- mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in the Contacts application. Calendar ⢠Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have cha nged the Ca lendar settings s o that the week starts on a day other than Monday, then the week numbers will not be shown. Browser Services â¢Q : No valid access point defined. Define one in Services settings. A: Insert proper browser settings. Contact your service provider for instructions. See â Setting up the phone for the browser service â , p. 118 . Log ⢠Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may hav e activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logge d. To see all events, select Options â Filter â All communication. PC connectivity ⢠Q: Why do I have problems in connecting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that PC Suite fo r Nokia 3660 is installed and running on your PC. See the In stallation guide for PC Suite on the CD- ROM in the âÂÂInstall' section. For further
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Troubleshooting 144 information on how to us e the PC Suite for Nokia 366 0, see the PC suite online help . Access codes ⢠Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a co de, cont act y our network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not responding ⢠Q: How do I close an applicat ion that is not responding? A: Open the application switching window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to the application, and press to close the application.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Battery information 145 18. Battery information Charging and Discharging ⢠Your phone is powered by a rechargeable battery. ⢠Note that a new battery's full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles! ⢠The bat tery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually w e ar out. When the op erating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time t o buy a new battery. ⢠Use only batteries approved by the phone manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer. Unplug the charger when not in use. Do not leave the ba ttery connected to a charger for longer than a week, s ince overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. ⢠Te mperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. ⢠Use the battery only for its intended purpose. ⢠N ever use any charger or battery that is damaged. ⢠Do not short-circuit the battery. Accident al short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in y our pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. ⢠Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to ke ep the battery betwee n 15ðC an d 25ðC (59ð F and 77ðF). A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the battery is fully charged. BatteryâÂÂs performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. ⢠Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! ⢠Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (e.g. recycling). Do not dispose of as household waste. ⢠Remove the battery only when the phone is switched off.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Care and maintenance 146 19. Care and maintenance Your phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated w ith care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy t his product for many years. ⢠Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or sto re the phone in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the phone in ho t areas. High temperature s can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperat ure), moisture can form inside, which may damage electr onic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the phone. Non-expert handling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, knock or shak e the phone. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not paint the phone. Pain t can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operat ion. ⢠Use a soft, clean and dry clot h to clean the camera le ns. ⢠U se only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. U nauthorised a n tennas, modifications or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your phone, battery, charger or any access ory. If any of them are not working properly, take it to yo ur nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will ass ist you and, if ne cessary, arrange for service.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Important safety information 147 20. Important safety information Traffic Safety Do not use a hand-held telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remember road safety always comes first! Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your phone whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. To maintain complianc e with RF exposure guidelines only use Nokia approved accessories. When the phone is on and being worn on the body, always use a Nokia approved carrying case. Parts of the phone are magnet ic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and pers ons with a hearing aid should not hold the phone to the ear wi th the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its holder, because metallic materials may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not place credi t cards or other magnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. Ho wever, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless phone. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consiste nt with the independent research by and recommendations of Wirele ss Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers: ⢠Should always keep the phone m o r e t h a n 2 0 c m ( 6 i n c h e s ) from their pacemaker when th e phone is switched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear o pposite the pacemaker to mi nimise the potential for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to su spect that interfe rence is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless phones may inte rfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interfe rence, you may want to consult your service provider. Other medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including cellular phones, may interfere with t he functionality of inadequately prot ected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of t he medical
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Important safety information 148 device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your phone in health care fa cilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affec t im properly installed or inadequately shielded electroni c syst ems in motor vehicles (e.g. electronic fue l injection systems, e lectronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag syst ems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult th e manufacturer o f an y equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices s o require. Potentially explosive atmosp heres Switch off your phone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions . Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily in jury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a refuelling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrict ions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and di stribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explos ive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storag e facilities ; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals o r particles, such as grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service the phone, or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty whic h may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wir eless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids , gases or explosive materials in the same compartmen t as the phone, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an ai r bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wirele ss equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperl y installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your phone while in the air is prohib ited. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to th e operation of the aircraft, disrupt t he wireless telephone network and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instruct ions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone se rvices to the offender, or le gal action or both.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Important safety information 149 Emergency calls Important: This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio s ignals, wireless and landline networks as well as user-programmed fu nctions. Because of this, connections in all conditio ns can not be guaranteed. Therefore you should never r ely solely upon any wire less phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call: 1 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. 2 Press as many times as need ed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear th e display and ready the phone for calls. 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location (e.g. 112 or other official emerge ncy number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. Consult this guide and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as pos sible. Remember that your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE EU REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSU RE TO RADIO WAV ES. Your mobile phone is a radio transmitt er and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not t o exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy recommended by The Council of the European Unio n. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scien tific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific st udies. The limits include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit recommended by The Council of the European Union is 2.0 W/kg.* Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions wi th the phone tra nsmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determin ed at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while ope rating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple powe r levels so as to use only the power required to reach t he network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is avai l able for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. Important safety information 150 shown. This directive i ncludes as one essential requirement the protection of the health an d the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for compl iance against the stan dard was 0.75 W/kg. While there may be differences betw een the SAR levels of various phones and at various posit ions, they all meet the EU requirements for RF exposure. This product meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm aw ay from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged ov er ten grams of tissue. The limit incorporates a substantia l margin of safety to give additional protection for the pub lic and to account for any variations in measurements. SA R values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other region s please look under product information at www.nokia.com.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 151 Index A Access codes 38 Access points 31 Settings 34 Settings, Advance d 36 Access points, glossary explanatio n 31 Accessories Settings 44 Activating loudspeaker 15 Alarm clock 112 Snooze 112 Animations 58 Answering a call 19 Automatic 44 Applications 125 Installing a Java application 126 Java application settings 127 Opening a Java application 127 Uninstalling a Java application 127 Attachments Retrieving 89 Viewing 89 Audio files See Media files Automatic answer 44 B Background image See Settings, General Barring calls 43 Battery information 145 Bluetooth 131 Cancelling pairing 135 Connection requests 134 Connection status indicators 134 Device icons 134 Disconnecting 136 Factory-set passcode 134 Pairing 134 Pairing requests 134 Passcode, glossary explanation 134 Receiving data 136 Sending data 133 Settings 132 Short names for paired devices 135 Unique device address 133 Bookmark, glossary explanation 119 Browser Browser access points, s ee Access points Connecting 118 Ending connections 123 Icons 119 WAP pages 117 XHTML pages 117 Browsing 120 Buffering Glossary explanation 66 Business card, glossary explanation 51 Sending 51 C Cache, glossary explanation 122 Calculator 108 Calendar 102 Alarm 105 Calendar entry fields 103 Data Import 107 Deleting many entries simultaneously 141 Remote synchronisat ion 139 Sending entries 105 Settings 105 Stopping alarms 105 Symbols 104 Views 104 Call barring 43 Call cost limit Resetting the counter 24 Set by a service provider 24 Call register See Log
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 152 Calling 17 With a voice tag 49 Calls Answering 19 Charging units 24 Conference calls 18 Cost limit 24 Dialled 22 Diverting 19 Duration 23 International 17 Missed 22 Options during a call 20 Received 22 Rejecting 19 Settings 29 Settings for diverting 21 Speed dialling 18 Transferring 20 Using the Contacts directory 17 Camera 53 Image types 55 Memory card 56 Memory consumption 56 Settings 54 CD-ROM 138 Cell broadcast messages 91 Cell info display 44 Certificates 41 Trust settings 42 Charges Packet data 33 Clearing memory Calendar entries 141 Log information 141 Clip See Video recorder Clock 112 Alarm 112 Settings 112 Composer 109 Adjusting sound volume 109 Adjusting tempo 109 Changing tone style 109 Listening to tones 109 Computer connections 138 Conference calls 18 Connection indicators Bluetooth 134 Data connections 10 Infrared 137 Connection set tings 31 Contact cards Adding voice tags 48 Assigning default numbers and addresses 47 Assigning speed dialling numbers 49 Attaching ringing tones 50 Changing voice tags 49 Deleting voice tags 49 Inserting pictures 46 Listening to voice tags 49 Remote synchronisation 139 Removing ring ing tones 50 Storing DTMF tones 21 Voice tags 48 Contact groups 51 Adding many members at the s a me time 52 Adding ringing tones 50 Removing members 52 Contacts Data Import 52 Converter 110 Adding exchange rates 111 Converting currenc ies 111 Converting units 110 Renaming cu rrencies 111 Copying Contacts betwee n the SIM card and phone memory 45 Text 73 Creating Contact cards 45 Cutting Text 74 D Data connections Indicators 10
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 153 Settings 31 Data Import Calendar and To-do 107 Contacts 52 Date, setti ngs 38 Deleting Calendar entries 103 Contact cards 46 Delivery reports 69 Dialled numbers 22 Digital rights management 123 Disconnectin g Bluetooth 136 Display settings 29 Diverting calls 19 DNS, Domain Name Service, glossary explanation 36 DRM 123 DTMF tones, glossary e xplanation 20 E Editing Calendar entries 102 Contact cards 46 Text 71 E-mail 80 Attachments 89 Deleting 90 Offline 87 Online 86 Opening 88 Remote mailbox 85 Retrieving from mailbox 87 Saving attachments 89 Settings 96 Emergency calls 149 Erasing Call cost counters 25 Log 25 Recent calls register 22 F Favourites 101 Adding a shortcut 101 File formats JAD and JAR 128 RealOne Player 63 SIS file 128 Supported 89 Fixed dialling 40 Folders, creating, organising items to folders 14 G Games 113 General settings 27 GIF animations 58 GPRS See Packet data H Handsfree See Loudspeaker Headset 15 High speed data, glossary explanation 32 HSCSD See High spe ed data I Idle state See Standby mode Image modes 55 Images 57 Adding to a contact card 46 Formats 59 Full scre en 58 Keyboard shortcuts when viewing images 59 Memory consumption 56 Moving the focus 58 Organising 59 Picture messages folder 60 Receiving from a digital camera 57 Rotating 58 Viewing image details 59 Zooming 58 Importing data from other Nokia phones 52, 107 Indicators 9 Data connections 10 Info service 91 Infrared 136 Installing software 129
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 154 Internet access points (IA P) See Access points IP address, glossary explanation 36 ISDN, glossary explanation 36 ISP See Internet service provider J JAD and JAR files 128 Java See Applications. JPEG, glossary explanation 53 L Language for writing 28 Limit for call costs 24 Listening to message s 18 Lock code 39 Log Erasing contents 25 Filtering 25 Recent calls 22 Settings 26 Loopset Activating 44 Loudspeaker 15 Activating 15 Turning off 15 M Mailbox 85 Disconnecting 88 Making calls 17 Media files File formats 63 Glossary explanation 63 Playing 64 Memory card 114 Backup 115 Camera 56 Consumption 116 Format 115 Password 116 Restore 115 Unlock 116 Video clips 114 Memory low Troubleshooting 141 Viewing memory consumption 116 , 130 Menu 10 Menu key 10 Rearranging the main Menu 11 Messaging Delivery reports 69 Inbox 81 Main view 68 Messages on the SIM card 91 Multimedia messages 76 My folders 85 Outbox 91 Picture messages 76 Saving picture message graphics 60 Sent folder settings 98 Settings 92 Text messages 75 Writing e-mail 80 Writing text 71 Missed calls 22 Modem Using your phone as a modem 138 Multimedia messages 76 Creating 78 Playing sounds 83 Viewing 82 Music files See Media files My folders 85 N Notes 112 O Offline 87 Online 86 Online help 12 Organising Menu 11 Outbox 91 P Packet data 32
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 155 Connection timer 26 Data counter 26 Glossary explanation 32 Pricing 33 Settings 37 Pairing, glossary explanation 134 Password Memory card 116 Pasting Text 74 PC Connecting 138 PC Suite for Nokia 3660 138 Phonebook See Contacts Pictures Taking 53 Viewing 57 PIN code 38 Unblocking 39 Playing video 62, 64 Predictive text input 71 Tips 72 Turning off 73 Prices for packet data 33 Profiles 99 Renaming 100 Settings 99 R RealOne Player 63 File formats 63 Media guide 64 Streaming 65 Volume control 66 Received calls 22 Receiving Data via Blueto oth 136 Data via infrared 137 Ringing tones, Operator logos, and settings, see Smart messages Recent calls register 22 Call charging units 24 Call cost limit 24 Call costs 23 Call duration 23 Dialled numbers 22 Erasing call lists 22 Missed calls 22 Received calls 22 Recorder, recording sounds 113 Recording video 61 Recording voice tags 48 Rejecting calls 19 Remote mailbox 85 Disconnecting 88 Remote synchronisation 138 Removing software 130 Reports 69 Resolution, glossary explanation 55 Ringing tones 99 Adding a personal ringing tone 50 Muting 19 Receiving in a smart message 83 Settings 99 S Safety information Care and maintenanc e 146 Electronic devices 147 Emergency calls 149 Operating environment 147 Potentially explosive at mospheres 148 Traffic safety 147 Vehicles 148 Screen saver Settings 29 Search field 14 Security Access codes 38 Security certificates 41 Settings 38 Sending Calendar entries 105 Contact cards, Bu siness cards 51 Data via B l uetooth 133 Data via infrared 137 Media files 66 Video clips 62, 66 Service command editor 92 Service message
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All rights res erved. 156 Settings 97 Service messages 84 Service provider for data connections, glossary explanation 31 Settings 27 Access codes 38 Accessories 44 Applications (Javaâ¢) 127 Bluetooth 132 Calendar 105 Call barring 43 Call diverting 21 Camera 54 Certificates 41 Clock 112 Connection 31 Date and time 38 Device settin gs 27 Display 29 E-mail 96 Fixed dialling 40 General 27 Info service 98 Lock code 39 Log 26 Messaging 92 Messaging, Sent folde r 98 PIN code 38 RealOne Player 67 Security 38 Service messages 97 Sounds 99 Text messages 93 Video recorder 62 Shared memory 16 Shortcuts in Favourites 101 in Images 59 SIM card Copying names and numbers 45 Messages 91 Names and numbers 26 Viewing messages on SIM 26 SIS file 128 Smart messages Receiving 83 Sending 75 Snooze 112 Software Installing 129 Removing 130 Transferring a .SIS file to your phone 129 Sound files See Media files Sounds 99 Removing a personal ringing tone 50 Speed dialling 49 Making calls 18 Standby mode 8 Indicators 9 Settings 28 Stopping Alarm clock 112 Calendar alarm 105 Streaming Glossary explanation 65 Switching between applicat ions 12 Symbols for Calendar entries 104 Synchronisation See Remote synchronisation. SyncML See Remote synchronisation. T Taking pictures 53 Text input 71 Text message service centre Adding new 93 Text messages 75 Writing and sending 75 Text templates 85 Thumbnails In a contact card 46 Time, settings 38 To-do 106 Data Import 107 Tones 99 Tools
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. 157 See Manager - installing applications and software chapter Traditional text input 71 Transferring calls 20 Troubleshooting 141 U Unit converter 110 USSD commands 92 V vCard format 51 Video clips See Media files Video player See RealOne Player Video recorder 61 Memory card 62 Saving video clips 62 Sending video clips 62 Settings 62 Video clips 62 Viewing GIF animations 58 Images 57 Voice dialling 48 Voice ma ilbox 18 Changing the number 18 Diverting calls to voice mailbo x 21 Voice messages 18 Voice recorder 113 Voice tags 48 Adding 48 Changing 49 Deleting 49 Glossary explanation 45 Listening 49 Making calls 49 Volume con trol 14 During a call 17 W WAP pages Browser 117 Writing 71 Predictive text input 71 Predictive text input, tu rning off 73 Traditional text input 71 X XHTML browser 117 XHTML glossary explanation 117 XHTML pages Browser 117 Z Zooming 58